Reference Manual. 00809-0100-4107, Rev CB. September 2020. Rosemount. ™ . 2051 Pressure Transmitter with HART Revision 5 and 7 Selectable Protocol ...
Explosions can result in death or serious injury. Do not remove the transmitter covers in explosive environments when the circuit is live.
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA July 2017 RosemountTM 2051 Pressure Transmitter with HART® Revision 5 and 7 Selectable Protocol Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Title Page July 2017 RosemountTM 2051 Pressure Transmitter NOTICE Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before installing, using, or maintaining this product. For technical assistance, contacts are listed below: Customer Central Technical support, quoting, and order-related questions. United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST) Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211 Europe/Middle East/Africa - 49 (8153) 9390 North American Response Center Equipment service needs. 1-800-654-7768 (24 hoursincludes Canada) Outside of these areas, contact your local EmersonTM representative. The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings. For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Emerson Sales Representative. Title Page v Title Page July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA vi Title Page Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Contents July 2017 Contents Contents 1Section 1: Introduction 1.1 Using this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 Models covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2.1 Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2.2 Rosemount 2051T in-line Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2.3 Rosemount 2051L Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2.4 Rosemount 2051CF Series Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.3 HART installation flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.4 Transmitter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.5 Service support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.6 Product recycling/disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2Section 2: Configuration 2.1 Configuration overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.2 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.3 System readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.3.1 Confirm correct Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.4 Configuration basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.4.1 Configuring on the bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.4.2 Configuration tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.4.3 Setting the loop to manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.5 Verify configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.5.1 Verifying configuration with Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.5.2 Verifying configuration with AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.5.3 Verifying configuration with LOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.5.4 Verifying process variables configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.6 Basic setup of the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.6.1 Setting pressure units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.6.2 Setting transmitter output (transfer function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.6.3 Rerange the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.6.4 Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2.7 Configuring the LCD display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.8 Detailed transmitter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.8.1 Configuring alarm and saturation levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.8.2 Configuring Scaled Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Contents July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 2.8.3 Re-mapping device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2.9 Performing transmitter tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2.9.1 Verifying alarm level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2.9.2 Performing an analog loop test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2.9.3 Simulate device variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2.10 Configuring burst mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2.11 Establishing multidrop communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 2.11.1 Changing a transmitter address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 2.11.2 Communicating with a multidropped transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3Section 3: Hardware Installation 3.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.3 Installation considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.3.1 Mechanical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.3.2 Environmental considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.4 Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.4.1 Mount the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.4.2 Impulse piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.4.3 Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3.4.4 In-line process connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3.5 Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.5.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold installation procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.5.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold installation procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.5.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold installation procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.5.4 Manifold operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.6 Liquid level measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3.6.1 Open vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3.6.2 Closed vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 4Section 4: Electrical Installation 4.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 4.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 4.3 Local Operating Interface (LOI)/LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 4.3.1 Rotating LOI/LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 4.4 Configure security and simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 4.4.1 Security switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 4.4.2 HART Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Contents Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Contents July 2017 Contents 4.4.3 Configuration button lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 4.4.4 LOI password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 4.5 Setting transmitter alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 4.6 Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4.6.1 Conduit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4.6.2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4.6.3 Wiring the transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 4.6.4 Grounding the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 5Section 5: Operation and Maintenance 5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 5.2 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 5.3 Recommended calibration tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 5.4 Calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 5.4.1 Determining necessary sensor trims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 5.4.2 Determining calibration frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5.4.3 Compensating for span line pressure effects (range 4 and range 5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 5.5 Trim the pressure signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 5.5.1 Sensor trim overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 5.5.2 Perform a sensor trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 5.5.3 Recall factory trimsensor trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 5.6 Trim the analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 5.6.1 Performing digital-to-analog trim (4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 5.6.2 Performing digital-to-analog trim (4--20mA/1--5 V output trim) using other scale. . . . . 71 5.6.3 Recalling factory trimanalog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 5.7 Switching HART Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 5.7.1 Switching HART Revision with generic menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 5.7.2 Switching HART Revision with Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 5.7.3 Switching HART Revision with AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 5.7.4 Switching HART Revision with LOI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 6Section 6: Troubleshooting 6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 6.2 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 6.3 Diagnostic messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 6.3.1 Diagnostic message: Failed - fix now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 6.3.2 Diagnostic message: Maintenance - fix soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 6.3.3 Diagnostic message: Advisory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Contents July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 6.4 Disassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 6.4.1 Removing from service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 6.4.2 Removing terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 6.4.3 Removing the electronics board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 6.4.4 Removing sensor module from the electronics housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 6.5 Reassembly procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 6.5.1 Attaching electronics board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6.5.2 Installing terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6.5.3 Reassembling the Rosemount 2051C Process Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6.5.4 Installing drain/vent valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 7Section 7: Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements 7.1 Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 7.1.1 Rosemount 2051 safety certified identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 7.1.2 Installation in SIS applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 7.1.3 Configuring in SIS applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 7.1.4 Rosemount 2051 SIS operation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 7.1.5 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 AAppendix A: Specifications and Reference Data A.1 Performance specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 A.1.1 Conformance to specification (±3s [Sigma]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 A.1.2 Reference accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 A.1.3 Flow performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 A.1.4 Dynamic performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 A.2 Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 A.2.1 Range and sensor limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 A.2.2 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 A.2.3 4--20 mA (output code A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 A.2.4 HART 1--5 Vdc low power (output code M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 A.2.5 Overpressure limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 A.2.6 Static pressure limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 A.2.7 Burst pressure limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A.2.8 Failure mode alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A.2.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A.2.10 Humidity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A.2.11 Volumetric displacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A.2.12 Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Contents Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Contents July 2017 A.3 Physical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A.3.1 Material selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A.3.2 Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A.3.3 Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A.3.4 Rosemount 2051C process wetted parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A.3.5 Rosemount 2051L Process wetted parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 A.3.6 Non-wetted parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 A.3.7 Shipping weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 A.4 Dimensional drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 A.5 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 A.5.1 Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 A.5.2 Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 A.5.3 Rosemount 2051CF Flowmeter Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 A.5.4 Rosemount 2051L Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 A.6 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 A.7 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 BAppendix B: Product Certifications B.1 European Directive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 B.2 Ordinary Location Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 B.3 North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 B.4 Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 B.5 International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 B.6 Brazil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 B.7 China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 B.8 Japan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 B.9 Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 B.9.1 Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 B.10 Additional Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 B.11 Approval drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 CAppendix C: Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys C.1 Field Communicator menu trees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 C.2 Field Communicator Fast Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Contents Contents July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA DAppendix D: Local Operator Interface D.1 LOI Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 D.2 LOI Menu Tree - Extended Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 D.3 Number entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 D.4 Text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Contents Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Section 1 Introduction Introduction July 2017 1.1 Using this manual The sections in this manual provide information on installing, operating, and maintaining the RosemountTM 2051Pressure Transmitter. The sections are organized as follows: Section 2: Configuration provides instruction on commissioning and operating Rosemount 2051. Information on software functions, configuration parameters, and online variables is also included. Section 3: Hardware Installation contains mechanical installation instructions, and field upgrade options. Section 4: Electrical Installation contains electrical installation instructions, and field upgrade options. Section 5: Operation and Maintenance provides detailed information on calibrating and changing HART® Revisions. Section 6: Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting techniques for the most common operating problems. Section 7: Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements provides identification, installation, configuration, operation and maintenance, and inspection information for Safety Instrumented Systems. Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data supplies reference and specification data, as well as ordering information. Appendix B: Product Certifications contains intrinsic safety approval information, European ATEX directive information, and approval drawings. Appendix C: Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys provides full menu trees and abbreviated Fast Key sequences for commissioning tasks. Appendix D: Local Operator Interface provides detailed LOI menu trees. Introduction 1 Introduction July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 Models covered The following Rosemount 2051 are covered by this manual: Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Measures differential and gage pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar). Rosemount 2051T in-line Pressure Transmitter Measures gage/absolute pressure up to 10000 psi (689,5 bar). Rosemount 2051L Level Transmitter Measures level and specific gravity up to 300 psi (20,7 bar). Rosemount 2051CF Series Flowmeter Measures flow in line sizes from 1/2-in. (15 mm) to 96-in. (2400 mm). Note For Rosemount 2051 with FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus, see Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitter with FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol Reference Manual. For Rosemount 2051 with PROFIBUS ® PA, see Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitter with PROFIBUS PA Protocol Reference Manual. 2 Introduction Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 1.3 HART installation flowchart Figure 1-1. HART Installation Flowchart START HERE Introduction July 2017 Bench calibration? No Configure for Pressure Yes Configure for Level Configure for Flow Set Units (page 13) Set Range Points (page 15) Configure Scaled Variable (page 22) Set Scaled Variable to PV (page 22) Configure Scaled Variable (page 22) Set Scaled Variable to PV (page 22) Select Linear Output (page 13) Set Damping (page 17) Field Install Verify Review Transmitter Configuration (page 11) Apply Pressure Configure Security and Alarm (page 50) Mount Transmitter (page 30) Check Process Connection (page 37) Wire Transmitter (page 55) Within specifications? Yes Power Transmitter (page 54) No Refer to Section 5: Operation and Maintenance Confirm Transmitter Configuration (page 11) Trim the Transmitter (page 66) Done Introduction 3 Introduction July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 1.4 Transmitter overview The Rosemount 2051C CoplanarTM design is offered for Differential Pressure (DP) and Gage Pressure (GP) measurements. The Rosemount 2051C utilizes capacitance sensor technology for DP and GP measurements. The Rosemount 2051T utilizes piezoresistive sensor technology for AP and GP measurements. The major components of the Rosemount 2051 are the sensor module and the electronics housing. The sensor module contains the oil filled sensor system (isolating diaphragms, oil fill system, and sensor) and the sensor electronics. The sensor electronics are installed within the sensor module and include a temperature sensor, a memory module, and the analog to digital signal converter (A/D converter). The electrical signals from the sensor module are transmitted to the output electronics in the electronics housing. The electronics housing contains the output electronics board, the optional external configuration buttons, and the terminal block. The basic block diagram of the Rosemount 2051CD is illustrated in Figure 1-3 on page 5. For the Rosemount 2051, pressure is applied to the isolating diaphragm(s). The oil deflects the sensor which then changes its capacitance or voltage signal. This signal is then changed to a digital signal by the Signal Processing. The microprocessor then takes the signals from the Signal Processing and calculates the correct output of the transmitter. This signal is then sent to the D/A converter, which converts the signal back to the analog signal, then superimposes the HART signal on the 4--20 mA output. An optional LCD can be ordered that connects directly to the interface board which maintains direct access to the signal terminals. The display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic messages. A glass display cover is provided. For 4--20 mA HART output, the LCD Display features a two-line display. The first line displays the actual measured value, the second line of six characters displays the engineering units. The LCD can also display diagnostic messages. Note LCD Display utilizes a 5 x 6 character display and can display output and diagnostic messages. The LOI Display uses an 8 x 6 character display and can display output, diagnostic messages, and LOI menu screens. The LOI Display comes with two buttons mounted on the front of the display board. See below figure. Figure 1-2. LOI/LCD Display LCD Display LOI Display 4 Introduction Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure 1-3. Block Diagram of Operation A B Introduction July 2017 C Signal Processing Temp. Sensor Sensor Module Memory Microprocessor · Sensor linearization · Rerange · Damping · Diagnostics · Engineering units · Communication Digital-to Analog Signal Conversion Digital Communication Memory · Configuration 1.5 D A. Sensor module B. Electronics board C. 4--20 mA signal to control system D. Field Communicator Service support Within the United States, call the Emerson Instrument and Valve Response Center using the 1-800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. This center, available 24 hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials. The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the process material to which the product was last exposed. For inquiries outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson representative for RMA instructions. To expedite the return process outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson representative. Individuals who handle products exposed to a hazardous substance can avoid injury if they are informed of and understand the hazard. The product being returned will require a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each substance must be included with the returned goods. Emerson Instrument and Valve Response Center representatives will explain the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to hazardous substances. Introduction 5 Introduction July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 1.6 Product recycling/disposal Recycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in accordance with local and national legislation/regulations. 6 Introduction Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Section 2 Configuration Configuration July 2017 2.1 2.2 Configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7 System readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8 Configuration basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9 Verify configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11 Basic setup of the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13 Configuring the LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 18 Detailed transmitter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 19 Performing transmitter tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 24 Configuring burst mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25 Establishing multidrop communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 26 Configuration overview This section contains information on commissioning and tasks that should be performed on the bench prior to installation, as well as tasks performed after installation as described in "Performing transmitter tests" on page 24. Field Communicator, AMSTM Device Manager, and Local Operator Interface (LOI) instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator Fast Key sequences are labeled "Fast Keys," and abbreviated LOI menus are provided for each function below. Full Field Communicator menu trees and Fast Key sequences are available in Appendix C: Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys. LOI menu trees are available in Appendix D: Local Operator Interface. Safety messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol. Configuration 7 Configuration July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 2.3 2.3.1 8 Explosions could result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Review the approvals section of the RosemountTM 2051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices. In an explosion-proof/flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power is applied to the unit. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. System readiness If using HART® based control or asset management systems, confirm the HART Protocol capability of such systems prior to commissioning and installation. Not all systems are capable of communicating with HART Revision 7 devices. For instructions on how to change the HART revision of your transmitter, see "Switching HART Revision" on page 72. Confirm correct Device Driver 1. Verify the latest Device Driver (DD/DTMTM) is loaded on your systems to ensure proper communications. 2. Reference Emerson.com or FieldCommGroup.org for the latest DD. 3. In the browse by member dropdown menu, select Rosemount business unit of EmersonTM. 4. Select desired Product a. Within Table 2-1, use the HART Universal Revision and Device Revision numbers to find the correct Device Driver Table 2-1. Rosemount 2051 Device Revisions and Files Identify device Find Device Driver Review instructions Review functionality Software release date NAMUR software revision(1) HART software revision(2) HART universal revision Device revision(3) Reference manual Changes to software August 2012 1.0.0 01 7 5 10 Rosemount 2051 (4) 9 Reference Manual January 1998 N/A 178 5 3 Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual N/A 1. NAMUR Software Revision is located on the hardware tag of the device 2. HART Software Revision can be read using a HART capable configuration tool. 3. Device Driver file names use Device and DD Revision, e.g. 10_01. HART Protocol is designed to enable legacy device driver revisions to continue to communicate with new HART devices. To access new functionality, the new Device Driver must be downloaded. It is recommended to download new Device Driver files to ensure full functionality. Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Configuration July 2017 2.4 4. HART Revision 5 and 7 Selectable, Safety Certified, Local Operator Interface, Scaled Variable, Configurable Alarms, Expanded Engineering Units. Configuration basics 2.4.1 Set all transmitter hardware adjustments during commissioning to avoid exposing the transmitter electronics to the plant environment after installation. The Rosemount 2051 can be configured either before or after installation. Configuring the transmitter on the bench using either a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or LOI ensures all transmitter components are in working order prior to installation. Verify that the security switch is set in the unlock position ( ) in order to proceed with configuration. See Figure 4-2 on page 51 for switch location. Configuring on the bench To configure on the bench, required equipment includes a power supply, and a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or an LOI (option M4). Wire equipment as shown in figure below. To ensure successful HART communication, a resistance of at least 250 s must be present between the transmitter and the power supply, see "Power supply" on page 54 for details. Connect the Field Communicator leads to the terminals labeled "COMM" on the terminal block or 1--5 V configuration, wire as shown in Figure 2-1 on page 9. The Field communicator is connected to the terminals labeled VOUT/COMM. Figure 2-1. Wiring the Transmitter (4--20 mA HART Protocol) B A A. Vdc supply B. RL 250 (necessary for HART communication only) Configuration 9 Configuration July 2017 2.4.2 Configuration tools Figure 2-2. Wiring the Transmitter (1--5 Vdc Low Power) A B Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A. DC power supply B. Voltmeter Configuring with a Field Communicator There are two interfaces available with the Field Communicator: Traditional and dashboard interfaces. All steps using a Field Communicator will be described using Dashboard interfaces. Figure 2-3 on page 10 shows the Device Dashboard interface. As stated in System readiness , it is critical that the latest DD's are loaded into the Field Communicator. Visit Emerson.com or FieldCommGroup.org to download latest DD library. Field Communicator menu trees and Fast Keys are available in Appendix C: Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys. Figure 2-3. Device Dashboard 2051 FT 45B Online 1. Overview 2. Configure 3. Service Tools SAVE Configuring with AMS Device Manager Full configuration capability with AMS Device Manager requires loading the most current DD for this device. Download the latest DD at Emerson.com or FieldCommGroup.org. Note All steps using AMS Device Manager will be described using version 11.5. 10 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Configuration July 2017 Configuring with a LOI The LOI requires option code M4 to be ordered. To activate the LOI push either configuration button. Configuration buttons are located on the LCD display (must remove housing cover to access), or underneath the top tag of the transmitter. See Table 2-2 for configuration button functionality and Figure 2-4 for configuration button location. When using the LOI for configuration, several features require multiple screens for a successful configuration. Data entered will be saved on a screen-by-screen basis; the LOI will indicate this by flashing "SAVED" on the LCD display each time. LOI menu trees are available in Appendix D: Local Operator Interface. Figure 2-4. LOI Configuration Buttons A B A. Internal configuration buttons B. External configuration buttons Table 2-2. LOI Button Operation 2.4.3 2.5 Configuration Button Left No Right Yes SCROLL ENTER Setting the loop to manual Whenever sending or requesting data that would disrupt the loop or change the output of the transmitter, set the process application loop to manual control. The Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or the LOI will prompt you to set the loop to manual when necessary. The prompt is only a reminder; acknowledging this prompt does not set the loop to manual. It is necessary to set the loop to manual control as a separate operation. Verify configuration It is recommended that various configuration parameters are verified prior to installation into the process. The various parameters are detailed out for each configuration tool. Depending on what configuration tool(s) are available follow the steps listed relevant to each tool. 11 Configuration July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 12 Verifying configuration with Field Communicator Configuration parameters listed in Table 2-3 are to be reviewed prior to transmitter installation. A Full list of configuration parameters that can be reviewed and configured using a Field Communicator are located in Appendix C: Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys. Fast Key sequences for the latest DD are shown in Table 2-3. For Fast Key sequences for legacy DD's contact your local Emerson. Table 2-3. Rosemount 2051 Device Dashboard Fast Key Sequence From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequences listed Fast Key Sequence Function HART 7 HART 5 Alarm and Saturation Levels Damping Primary Variable Range Values Tag Transfer Function Units 2, 2, 2, 5 2, 2, 1, 1, 5 2, 1, 1, 4, 1 2, 1, 1, 4 2, 2, 7, 1, 1 2, 2, 1, 1, 6 2, 2, 1, 1, 4 2, 2, 2, 5 2, 2, 1, 1, 5 2, 1, 1, 4, 1 2, 1, 1, 4 2, 2, 7, 1, 1 2, 2, 1, 1, 6 2, 2, 1, 1, 4 Verifying configuration with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and select Configuration Properties from the menu. Navigate the tabs to review the transmitter configuration data. Verifying configuration with LOI Select any configuration button to activate the LOI. Select VIEW CONFIG to review the below parameters. Use the configuration buttons to navigate through the menu. The parameters to be reviewed prior to installation include: Tag Units Transfer function Alarm and saturation levels Primary variable Range values Damping Verifying process variables configuration This section describes how to verify that the correct process variables are selected. Verifying process variables with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 3, 2, 1 Verifying process variables with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and select Overview from the menu. 1. Select the All Variables button to display the primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary variables. Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Configuration July 2017 2.6 2.6.1 Basic setup of the transmitter This section goes through the necessary steps for basic setup of a pressure transmitter. When installing in DP level or DP flow applications, refer to"Configuring Scaled Variable" on page 20 for setup instructions. Setting pressure units The pressure unit command sets the unit of measure for the reported pressure. Setting pressure units with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 2, 1, 1, 4 Setting pressure units with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. Select Manual Setup and select desired units from Pressure Units dropdown menu. 2. Select Send when complete. Setting pressure units with a LOI Follow Figure 2-5 on page 13 to select desired pressure and temperature units. Use the SCROLL and ENTER buttons to select desired unit. Save by selecting SAVE as indicated on the LCD display. Figure 2-5. Selecting Units with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU UNITS PRESS UNITS TEMP UNITS BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU PRESS UNITS INH2O MMHG CMHG0C MHG0C PSI PSF ATM TORR PA KPA ... 2.6.2 Setting transmitter output (transfer function) The Rosemount 2051 has two output settings: Linear and square root. As shown in Figure 2-7 on page 14, activating the square root options makes analog output proportional to flow, and includes a fixed low flow cutoff at five percent. However, for DP Flow and DP Level applications it is recommended to use scaled variable. Refer to "Configuring Scaled Variable" on page 20 for setup instructions. Configuration 13 Configuration July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Setting transmitter output with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 2, 1, 1, 6 Setting transmitter output with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. Select Manual Setup and choose output type from analog output transfer function and select Send. 2. Carefully read the warning and select Yes if it is safe to apply the changes. Setting transmitter output with a LOI Reference Figure 2-6 on page 14 to select either linear or square root transfer function using the LOI. Figure 2-6. Set Output with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMLATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU TRANSFER FUNCT LINEAR TRANSFER FUNCTION SQR ROOT TRANSFER FUNCTION BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU Figure 2-7. 4--20 mA HART Square Root Output Transition Point 20mA C 4 mA 0 A B 0.5 % Pressure Input A. Square root curve B. Five percent transition point C. Four percent transition point A 4 mA 0 B 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 % Pressure Input 80 90 100 1 14 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Configuration July 2017 2.6.3 Rerange the transmitter The Range Values command sets each of the lower and upper range analog values (4 and 20 mA/1--5 Vdc points) to a pressure. The lower range point represents zero percent of range and the upper range point represents 100 percent of range. In practice, the transmitter range values may be changed as often as necessary to reflect changing process requirements. For a complete listing of range and sensor limits, refer to "Range and sensor limits" on page 95. Select from one of the methods below to rerange the transmitter. Each method is unique; examine all options closely before deciding which method works best for your process. Rerange by manually setting range points with a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or LOI. Rerange with a pressure input source and a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, LOI, or local zero and span buttons. Manually rerange the transmitter by entering range points Entering range points with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 1 Entering range points with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and select Configure: 1. Select Manual Setup and select Analog Output. 2. Enter upper and lower range values in the Range Limits box and select Send. 3. Carefully read the warning and select Yes if it is safe to apply the changes. Entering range points with a LOI Reference Figure 2-8 on page 15 to rerange the transmitter using the LOI. Enter values using SCROLL and ENTER buttons. Figure 2-8. Rerange with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU RERANGE ENTER VALUES APPLY VALUES BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU ENTER VALUES LRV URV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU Rerange the transmitter with applied pressure source Reranging using an applied pressure source is a way of reranging the transmitter without entering specific 4 and 20 mA (1--5 Vdc) points. Configuration 15 Configuration July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 2 Rerange with an applied pressure source using AMS Device Manager Right click on the device, select Configure. 1. Select the Analog Output tab. 2. Select Range by Applying Pressure button and follow the screen prompts range the transmitter. Rerange with an applied pressure source using an LOI Use Figure 2-9 to manually rerange the device using an applied pressure source with an LOI. Figure 2-9. Rerange with Applied Pressure Using LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU RERANGE ENTER VALUES APPLY VALUES BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU APPLY VALUES LRV URV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU Rerange with an applied pressure source using local zero and span buttons If ordered, local zero and span buttons (option code D4) can be used to rerange the transmitter with an applied pressure. Refer to Figure 2-10 on page 17 for analog zero and span button location. To rerange the transmitter using the span and zero buttons, perform the following procedure: 1. Loosen the screw holding the top tag of the transmitter housing. Rotate the label to expose the zero and span buttons. 2. Confirm device has local zero and span buttons by verifying blue retainer under the tag. 3. Apply transmitter pressure. 4. Rerange the transmitter. a. To change the zero (4 mA/1 V point) while maintaining the span: press and hold zero button for at least two seconds then release. b. To change the span (20 mA/5 V point) while maintaining the zero point: press and hold the span button for at least two seconds and then release. Note 4 mA and 20 mA points must maintain the minimum span defined in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data. 16 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure 2-10. Analog Zero and Span Buttons Configuration July 2017 2.6.4 A A. Zero and span buttons If the transmitter security is on, adjustments to the zero and span will not be able to be made. Refer to "Configure security and simulation" on page 50 for security information. The span is maintained when the 4 mA/1 V point is set. The span changes when the 20 mA/5 V point is set. If the lower range point is set to a value that causes the upper range point to exceed the sensor limit, the upper range point is automatically set to the sensor limit, and the span is adjusted accordingly. Regardless of the range points, the Rosemount 2051 will measure and report all readings within the digital limits of the sensor. For example, if the 4 and 20 mA(1--5 Vdc) points are set to 0 and 10 inH2O, and the transmitter detects a pressure of 25 inH2O, it digitally outputs the 25 inH2O reading and a 250 percent of range reading. Damping The damping command changes the response time of the transmitter; higher values can smooth variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. Determine the appropriate damping setting based on the necessary response time, signal stability, and other requirements of the loop dynamics within your system. The damping command utilizes floating point configuration allowing the user to input any damping value within 0.0--60.0 seconds. Damping with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 2, 1, 1, 5 Enter desired Damping Value and select APPLY. Damping with AMS Device Manager Right select on the device and select Configure. Configuration 17 Configuration July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 1. Select Manual Setup. 2. Within the Pressure Setup box, enter desired damping value and select Send. 3. Carefully read the warning and select Yes if it is safe to apply the changes. Damping with a LOI Reference Figure 2-11 to enter damping values using an LOI. Figure 2-11. Damping with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMLATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU 2.7 18 Configuring the LCD display The LCD display configuration command allows customization of the LCD display to suit application requirements. The LCD display will alternate between the selected items. Pressure units % of range Scaled variable Sensor temperature mA/Vdc output In the following instructions, the LCD display can also be configured to display configuration information during the device startup. Select Review Parameters at Startup to enable or disable this functionality. Reference Figure 1-2 on page 4 LCD display with LOI for image of LCD screen. Configuring LCD Display with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys Configuring LCD display with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. Select Manual Setup, select the Display tab. 2. Select desired display options and select Send. Configuring LCD display with a LOI Refer to Figure 2-12 for LCD display configuration using a LOI. 2, 2, 4 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Configuration July 2017 Figure 2-12. Display with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU DISPLAY PRESS (on/off) SCALED (on/off) TEMP (on/off) %RANGE (on/off) ANALOG (on/off) STRTUP (on/off) BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU 2.8 2.8.1 Configuration Detailed transmitter setup Configuring alarm and saturation levels In normal operation, the transmitter will drive the output in response to pressure from the lower to upper saturation points. If the pressure goes outside the sensor limits, or if the output would be beyond the saturation points, the output will be limited to the associated saturation point. The Rosemount 2051 Transmitter automatically and continuously performs self-diagnostic routines. If the self-diagnostic routines detect a failure, the transmitter drives the output to configured alarm and value based on the position of the alarm switch. See "Setting transmitter alarm" on page 53. Table 2-4. Rosemount Alarm and Saturation Values Level 4--20 mA saturation 4--20 mA alarm Low High 3.9 mA (0.97 V) 20.8 mA (5.2 V) 3.75 mA (0.95 V) 21.75 mA (5.4 V) Table 2-5. NAMUR-Compliant Alarm and Saturation Values Level 4--20 mA saturation 4--20 mA alarm Low High 3.8 mA (0.95 V) 20.5 mA (5.125 V) 3.6 mA (0.9 V) 22.5 mA (5.625 V) Table 2-6. Custom Alarm and Saturation Values Level 4--20 mA saturation 4--20 mA alarm Low High 3.7 mA to 3.9 mA 20.1 mA to 22.9 mA 3.6 mA to 3.8 mA 20.2 mA to 23.0 mA Failure mode alarm and saturation levels can be configured using a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, and the LOI. The following limitations exist for custom levels: Low alarm level must be less than the low saturation level High alarm level must be higher than the high saturation level Alarm and saturation levels must be separated by at least 0.1 mA The configuration tool will provide an error message if the configuration rule is violated. 19 Configuration July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 2.8.2 Note Transmitters set to HART multidrop mode send all saturation and alarm information digitally; saturation and alarm conditions will not affect the analog output. See also "Establishing multidrop communication" on page 26. Configuring alarm and saturation levels using a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 5 Configuring alarm and saturation levels with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device, and select Configure. 1. Select Configure Alarm and Saturation Levels button. 2. Follow screen prompts to configure Alarm and Saturation Levels. Configuring alarm and saturation levels using LOI Refer to Figure 2-13 for instructions to configure alarm and saturation levels. Figure 2-13. Configuring Alarm and Saturation with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU ALARM SAT VALUES ROSEMOUNT VALUES NAMUR VALUES OTHER VALUES BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU Configuring Scaled Variable The Scaled Variable configuration allows the user to create a relationship/conversion between the pressure units and user-defined/custom units. There are two use cases for scaled variable. The first use case is to allow custom units to be displayed on the transmitter's LOI/LCD display. The second use case is to allow custom units to drive the transmitter's 4--20 mA output. If the user desires custom units to drive the 4--20 mA (1--5 Vdc) output, scaled variable must be re-mapped as the primary variable. Refer to "Re-mapping device variables" on page 23. 20 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Configuration July 2017 The scaled variable configuration defines the following items: Scaled Variable units - custom units to be displayed. Scaled data options - defines the transfer function for the application -- Linear -- Square root Pressure value position 1 - lower known value point with consideration of linear offset. Scaled Variable value position 1 - custom unit equivalent to the lower known value point. Pressure value position 2 - upper known value point. Scaled Variable value position 2 - custom unit equivalent to the upper known value point Linear offset - the value required to zero out pressures effecting the desired pressure reading. Low flow cutoff - point at which output is driven to zero to prevent problems caused by process noise. It is highly recommended to use the low flow cutoff function in order to have a stable output and avoid problems due to process noise at a low flow or no flow condition. A low flow cutoff value that is practical for the flow element in the application should be entered. Configuring scaled variable using a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 1, 4, 7 1. Follow the screen prompts to configure Scaled Variable. a. When configuring for level, select Linear under Select Scaled data options. b. When configuring for flow, select Square Root under Select Scaled data options. Configuring scaled variable using AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and, select Configure. 1. Select the Scaled Variable tab and select the Scaled Variable button. 2. Follow screen prompts to configure Scaled Variable a. When configuring for level applications, select Linear under Select Scaled data options. b. When configuring for flow applications, select Square Root under Select Scaled data options. Configuring scaled variable using a LOI Refer to Figure 2-14 on page 21 for instructions to configure scaled variable using a LOI. Figure 2-14. Configuring Scaled Variable using a Local Operator Interface VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMLATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU SCALED VARIAB VIEW SCALED CONFIG SCALED BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU Configuration 21 Configuration July 2017 DP level example Figure 2-15. Example Tank Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 230-in. 200-in. 0.94 sg H L 12-in. A differential transmitter is used in a level application. Once installed on an empty tank and taps vented, the process variable reading is --209.4 inH2O. The process variable reading is the head pressure created by fill fluid in the capillary. Based on Table 2-7 on page 22, the scaled variable configuration would be as follows: Table 2-7. Scaled Variable Configuration for Tank Application Scaled variable units: Scaled data 13: Pressure value position 1: Scaled Variable position 1: Pressure value position 2: Scaled Variable position 2: Linear offset: DP flow example inch linear 0 inH2O 12-in. 188 inH2O 212-in. --209.4 inH2O A differential pressure transmitter is used in conjunction with an orifice plate in a flow application where the differential pressure at full scale flow is 125 inH2O. In this particular application, the flow rate at full scale flow is 20,000 gallons of water per hour. It is highly recommended to use the low flow cutoff function in order to have a stable output and avoid problems due to process noise at a low flow or no flow condition. A low flow cutoff value that is practical for the flow element in the application should be entered. In this particular example, the low flow cutoff value is 1000 gallons of water per hour. Based on this information, the Scaled Variable configuration would be as follows: Table 2-8. Scaled Variable Configuration for Flow Application Scaled Variable units: Scaled data options: Pressure value position 2: Scaled Variable position 2: Low Flow Cutoff: gal/h square root 125 inH2O 20,000 gal/h 1000 gal/h 22 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Configuration July 2017 2.8.3 Note Pressure value position 1 and Scaled Variable position 1 are always set to zero for a flow application. No configuration of these values is required. Re-mapping device variables The re-mapping function allows the transmitter primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary variables (PV, 2V, 3V, and 4V) to be configured as desired. The PV can be remapped with a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or a LOI. Variables (2V, 3V, and 4V) can only be re-mapped via Field Communicator or AMS Device Manager. Note The variable assigned to the primary variable drives the 4--20 mA (1--5 Vdc) output. This value can be selected as pressure or scaled variable. The 2, 3, and 4 variables only apply if HART burst mode is being used. Re-mapping using a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Fast Keys 2, 1, 1, 3 Re-mapping using AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. Select Manual Setup and select on the HART tab. 2. Assign Primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary variables under Variable Mapping. 3. Select Send. 4. Carefully read the warning and select Yes if it is safe to apply the changes. Re-mapping using LOI Refer to Figure 2-16 for instructions to remap the primary variable using a LOI. Figure 2-16. Re-Mapping with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU Configuration 23 Configuration July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 Performing transmitter tests Verifying alarm level If the transmitter electronics board, sensor module, or LOI/LCD display is repaired or replaced, verify the transmitter alarm level before returning the transmitter to service. This is useful in testing the reaction of the control system to a transmitter in an alarm state. Thus ensuring the control system recognizes the alarm when activated. To verify the transmitter alarm values, perform a loop test and set the transmitter output to the alarm value (see Table 2-4, 2-5, and 2-6 on page 19, and "Verifying alarm level" on page 24). Note Before returning transmitter to service, verify security switch is set to the correct position. Refer to "Verify configuration" on page 11. Performing an analog loop test The analog loop test command verifies the output of the transmitter, the integrity of the loop, and the operations of any recorders or similar devices installed in the loop. It is recommended that the 4--20 mA (1--5 Vdc) points in addition to alarm levels when installing, repairing, or replacing a transmitter. The host system may provide a current measurement for the 4--20 mA (1--5 Vdc) HART output. If not, connect a reference meter to the transmitter by either connecting the meter to the test terminals on the terminal block, or shunting transmitter power through the meter at some point in the loop. For 1--5 V output, voltage measurement is directly measured from Vout to (--) terminals. Performing a analog loop test using a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 3, 5, 1 Performing a analog loop test using AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and, within the Methods dropdown menu, move cursor over Diagnostics and Test. In the Diagnostics and Test dropdown menu select Loop Test. 1. Select Next after setting the control loop to manual. 2. Follow screen prompts to perform a loop test. 3. Select Finish to acknowledge the method is complete. Performing analog loop test using a LOI To perform an analog loop test using the LOI, the 4 mA (1 V), 20 mA (5 V), and custom mA point may be set manually. Reference Figure 2-17 for instructions on how to perform a transmitter loop test using an LOI. 24 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Configuration July 2017 2.9.3 2.10 Figure 2-17. Performing an Analog Loop Test Using an LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU LOOP TEST SET 4MA SET 20MA SET CUSTOM END LOOP TEST BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU Simulate device variables It is possible to temporarily set the to a user-defined fixed value for testing purposes. Once the simulated variable method is left, the process variable will be automatically returned to a live measurement. Simulate device variables is only available in HART Revision 7 mode. Simulate digital signal with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 3, 5 Simulate digital signal with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and select Service Tools. 1. Select Simulate. 2. Under Device Variables select a digital value to simulate. a. Pressure b. Sensor Temperature c. Scaled Variable 3. Follow the screen prompts to simulate selected digital value. Configuring burst mode Burst mode is compatible with the analog signal. Because the HART features simultaneous digital and analog data transmission, the analog value can drive other equipment in the loop while the control system is receiving the digital information. Burst mode applies only to the transmission of dynamic data (pressure and temperature in engineering units, pressure in percent of range, Scaled Variable, and/or analog output), and does not affect the way other transmitter data is accessed. However, when activated, bust mode can slow down communication of non-dynamic data to the host by 50 percent. Access to information other than dynamic transmitter data is obtained through the normal poll/response method of HART Protocol communication. A Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or the control system may request any of the information that is normally available while the transmitter is in burst mode. Between each message sent by the transmitter, a short pause allows the Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or a control system to initiate a request. Configuration 25 Configuration July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 2.11 Choosing burst mode options in HART 5 Message content options: PV only Percent of Range PV, 2V, 3V, 4V Process Variables Device Status Choosing burst mode options in HART 7 Message content options: PV only Percent of Range PV, 2V, 3V, 4V Process Variables and Status Process Variables Device Status Choosing a HART 7 Trigger Mode When in HART 7 mode, the following trigger modes can be selected. Continuous (same as HART 5 burst mode) Rising Falling Windowed On Change Note Consult your host system manufacturer for burst mode requirements. Configuring burst mode using a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 2, 5, 3 Configuring burst mode using AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. Select the HART tab. 2. Enter the configuration in burst mode configuration fields. Establishing multidrop communication Multidropping transmitters refers to the connection of several transmitters to a single communications transmission line. Communication between the host and the transmitters takes place digitally with the analog output of the transmitters deactivated. 26 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Configuration July 2017 Multidrop installation requires consideration of the update rate necessary from each transmitter, the combination of transmitter models, and the length of the transmission line. Communication with transmitters can be accomplished with HART modems and a host implementing HART Protocol. Each transmitter is identified by a unique address and responds to the commands defined in the HART Protocol. Field Communicators and AMS Device Manager can test, configure, and format a multidropped transmitter the same way as a transmitter in a standard point-to-point installation. Figure 2-18 shows a typical multidrop network. This figure is not intended as an installation diagram. Note A multidrop transmitter in HART Revision 7 mode has a fixed analog output of 4 mA for all but one device. Only one device is allowed to have an active analog signal. Figure 2-18. Typical Multidrop Network (4--20 mA only) A B 2.11.1 A. HART modem B. Power supply The Rosemount 2051 is set to address zero (0) at the factory, which allows operation in the standard point-to-point manner with a 4--20 mA output signal. To activate multidrop communication, the transmitter address must be changed to a number from 1 to 15 for HART Revision 5, or 1 to 63 for HART Revision 7. This change deactivates the 4--20 mA analog output, sending it to 4 mA. It also disables the failure mode alarm signal, which is controlled by the upscale/downscale switch position. Failure signals in multidropped transmitters are communicated through HART messages. Changing a transmitter address To activate multidrop communication, the transmitter poll address must be assigned a number from 1 to 15 for HART Revision 5, and 1 to 63 for HART Revision 7. Each transmitter in a multidropped loop must have a unique poll address. Changing transmitter address using a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys HART Revision 5 2, 2, 5, 2, 1 HART Revision 7 2, 2, 5, 2, 2 Configuration 27 Configuration July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 2.11.2 Changing transmitter address using AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. In HART Revision 5 mode: a. Select on Manual Setup, select the HART tab. b. In the Communication Settings box enter polling address in the Polling Address box, select Send. 2. In HART Revision 7 mode: a. Select on Manual Setup, select the HART tab and select the Change Polling Address button. 3. Carefully read the warning and select Yes if it is safe to apply the changes. Communicating with a multidropped transmitter To communicate with a multidrop transmitter, the Field Communicator or AMS Device Manager has to be set up for Polling. Communicating with a multidropped transmitter using a Field Communicator 1. Select Utility and Configure HART Application. 2. Select Polling Addresses. 3. Enter 0-63. Communicating with a multidropped transmitter using AMS Device Manager Select on the HART modem icon and select Scan All Devices. 28 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Section 3 Hardware Installation Installation July 2017 3.1 3.2 3.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29 Installation considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29 Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 30 Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 39 Liquid level measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 45 Overview The information in this section covers installation considerations for the RosemountTM 2051 Pressure Transmitter with PROFIBUS® PA. A Quick Start Guide is shipped with every transmitter to describe pipe-fitting, wiring procedures and basic configuration for initial installation. Safety messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol. Explosions could result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Review the approvals section of this reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. In an Explosion-Proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power is applied to the unit. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. Installation considerations Measurement accuracy depends upon proper installation of the transmitter and impulse piping. Mount the transmitter close to the process and use a minimum of piping to achieve best accuracy. Keep in mind the need for easy access, personnel safety, practical field calibration, and a suitable transmitter environment. Install the transmitter to minimize vibration, shock, and temperature fluctuation. Installation 29 Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4 3.4.1 Important Install the enclosed pipe plug (found in the box) in unused conduit opening. Engage a minimum of five threads to comply with explosion-proof requirements. See "Conduit entry threads" on page 31 for additional requirements. For material compatibility considerations, see Material Selection Technical Note. Mechanical considerations Steam service For steam service or for applications with process temperatures greater than the limits of the transmitter, do not blow down impulse piping through the transmitter. Flush lines with the blocking valves closed and refill lines with water before resuming measurement. Side mounted When the transmitter is mounted on its side, position the coplanar flange to ensure proper venting or draining. Mount the flange as shown in Figure 3-8 on page 36, keeping drain/vent connections on the bottom for gas service and on the top for liquid service. Environmental considerations Best practice is to mount the transmitter in an environment that has minimal ambient temperature change. The transmitter electronics temperature operating limits are --40 to 185 °F (--40 to 85 °C). Refer to Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data that lists the sensing element operating limits. Mount the transmitter so that it is not susceptible to vibration and mechanical shock and does not have external contact with corrosive materials. Installation procedures Mount the transmitter For dimensional drawing information refer to "Dimensional drawings" on page 102. Process flange orientation Mount the process flanges with sufficient clearance for process connections. For safety reasons, place the drain/vent valves so the process fluid is directed away from possible human contact when the vents are used. In addition, consider the need for a testing or calibration input. Housing rotation To improve field access to wiring or to better view the optional LCD display: 1. Loosen the housing rotation set screw using a 5/64-in. hex wrench. 2. Turn the housing left or right maximum up to 180° from its original position(1). Over rotating can damage the transmitter. 3. Re-tighten the housing rotation set screw to no more than 7 in-lb when desired location is reached. 1, The Rosemount 2051C original position aligns with "H" side; Rosemount 2051T original position is the opposite side of bracket holes. 30 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure 3-1. Housing Rotation Installation July 2017 Installation A A. Housing rotation set screw (5/64-in.) Terminal side of electronics housing Mount the transmitter so the terminal side is accessible. Clearance of 0.75-in. (19 mm) is required for cover removal. Use a conduit plug in the unused conduit opening. Circuit side of electronics housing Provide 0.75-in. (19 mm) of clearance for units with out an LCD display. If LCD display is installed, mount for clear visibility. Three inches of clearance is required for LCD display cover removal. Conduit entry threads For NEMA® 4X, IP66, and IP68 requirements, use thread seal (PTFE) tape or paste on male threads to provide a watertight seal. Environmental seal for housing Thread sealing (PTFE) tape or paste on male threads of conduit is required to provide a water/dust tight conduit seal and meets requirements of NEMA Type 4X, IP66, and IP68. Consult factory if other ingress protection ratings are required. For M20 threads, install conduit plugs to full thread engagement or until mechanical resistance is met. Always ensure a proper seal by installing electronics housing cover(s) so that metal contacts metal. Use Rosemount O-rings. Mounting brackets Rosemount 2051 may be panel-mounted or pipe-mounted through an optional mounting bracket. Refer to Table 3-1 for the complete offering and see Figure 3-2 through Figure 3-6 on pages 32 and 34 for dimensions and mounting configurations. Table 3-1. Mounting Brackets Option code B4 B1 B2 Process connections Rosemount 2051 Brackets Mounting Coplanar In-line Traditional Pipe Panel Flat panel X X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X X X X X N/A N/A X N/A X N/A Carbon steel bracket N/A X X Materials Stainless steel bracket Carbon Stainless steel steel bolts bolts X N/A X N/A X N/A N/A X N/A 31 Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table 3-1. Mounting Brackets Option code B3 B7 B8 B9 BA BC Process connections Rosemount 2051 Brackets Mounting Coplanar In-line Traditional Pipe Panel Flat panel N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X N/A N/A X X X N/A N/A X N/A X N/A X N/A N/A X X X N/A N/A X N/A N/A X Carbon steel bracket X X X X N/A N/A Materials Stainless steel bracket Carbon Stainless steel steel bolts bolts N/A X N/A N/A N/A X N/A N/A X N/A N/A X X N/A X X N/A X Figure 3-2. Mounting Bracket Option Code B4 B 2.8 (71) A 3.4 (85) A. 3/8--16 x 11/4-in. bolts for mounting to transmitter B. 5/16 x 11/2-in. bolts for panel mounting (not supplied) Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Figure 3-3. Mounting Bracket Option Codes B1, B7, and BA 3.75 (95) 1.65 (42) 3.87 (98) 2.62 (67) 4.97 (127) 2.81 (71) Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). 32 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure 3-4. Panel Mounting Bracket Option Codes B2 and B8 A 3.75 (95) 1.65 (42) 3.87 (98) 2.81 (71) 4.5 (114) A. Mounting holes 0.375 diameter (10) Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). 1.40 (36) 1.40 (36) 1.40 (36) Figure 3-5. Flat Mounting Bracket Option Codes B3 and BC 1.62 (41) 2.125 (54) 8 (203) 2.81 (71) Installation July 2017 Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Flange bolts The Rosemount 2051 can be shipped with a coplanar flange or a traditional flange installed with four 1.75-inch flange bolts. Mounting bolts and bolting configurations for the coplanar and traditional flanges can be found on page 34. Stainless steel bolts supplied by EmersonTM are coated with a lubricant to ease installation. Carbon steel bolts do not require lubrication. No additional lubricant should be applied when installing either type of bolt. Bolts supplied by Emerson are identified by their head markings: Carbon Steel (CS) Head Markings B7M 316 B8M F593_(1) Stainless Steel (SST) Head Markings 1.The last digit in the F593_ head marking may be any letter between A and M. Installation 33 Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Bolt installation Only use bolts supplied with the Rosemount 2051 or sold by Emerson as spare parts for the Rosemount 2051 Transmitter. Use the following bolt installation procedure: 1. Finger-tighten the bolts. 2. Torque the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossing pattern (see Table 3-2 for torque values). 3. Torque the bolts to the final torque value using the same crossing pattern. Table 3-2. Bolt Installation Torque Values Bolt material Carbon steel -ASTM-A445 standard 316 stainless steeloption L4 ASTM-A-193-B7Moption L5 Alloy 400option L6 Initial torque value 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 150 in-lb (17 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m) Final torque value 650 in-lb (73 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 650 in-lb (73 N-m) 650 in-lb (73 N-m) Figure 3-6. Traditional Flange Bolt Configurations Differential transmitter Gage/Absolute transmitter A B A 1.75 (44) × 4 1.50 (38) × 4 A. Drain/vent B. Plug Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). 1.75 (44) × 4 1.50 (38) × 2 34 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure 3-7. Mounting Bolts and Bolt Configurations for Coplanar Flange Transmitter with flange bolts Transmitter with flange adapters and flange/adapter bolts Installation July 2017 3.4.2 1.75 (44) × 4 Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). 2.88 (73) × 4 Description Flange bolts Flange/adapter bolts Manifold/flange bolts Size in. (mm) 1.75 (44) 2.88 (73) 2.25 (57) Note Rosemount 2051T Transmitters are direct mount and do not require bolts for process connection. Impulse piping Mounting requirements Impulse piping configurations depend on specific measurement conditions. Refer to Figure 3-8 for examples of the following mounting configurations: Liquid flow measurement 1. Place taps to the side of the line to prevent sediment deposits on the transmitter's process isolators. 2. Mount the transmitter beside or below the taps so gases can vent into the process line. 3. Mount drain/vent valve upward to allow gases to vent. Gas flow measurement 1. Place taps in the top or side of the line. 2. Mount the transmitter beside or above the taps so liquid will drain into the process line. Installation 35 Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Steam flow measurement 1. Place taps to the side of the line. 2. Mount the transmitter below the taps to ensure that the impulse piping will stay filled with condensate. 3. In steam service above 250 °F (121 °C), fill impulse lines with water to prevent steam from contacting the transmitter directly and to ensure accurate measurement start-up. Note For steam or other elevated temperature services, it is important that temperatures at the process connection do not exceed the transmitter's process temperature limits. Figure 3-8. Installation Examples Liquid service Gas service Steam service Flow Flow Flow Best practices The piping between the process and the transmitter must accurately transfer the pressure to obtain accurate measurements. There are five possible sources of error: pressure transfer, leaks, friction loss (particularly if purging is used), trapped gas in a liquid line, liquid in a gas line, and density variations between the legs. The best location for the transmitter in relation to the process pipe is dependent on the process. Use the following guidelines to determine transmitter location and placement of impulse piping: Keep impulse piping as short as possible. For liquid service, slope the impulse piping at least 1-in/ft (8 cm/m) upward from the transmitter toward the process connection. For gas service, slope the impulse piping at least 1-in/ft (8 cm/m) downward from the transmitter toward the process connection. Avoid high points in liquid lines and low points in gas lines. Make sure both impulse legs are the same temperature. Use impulse piping large enough to avoid friction effects and blockage. Vent all gas from liquid piping legs. When using a sealing fluid, fill both piping legs to the same level. When purging, make the purge connection close to the process taps and purge through equal lengths of the same size pipe. Avoid purging through the transmitter. Keep corrosive or hot (above 250 °F [121 °C]) process material out of direct contact with the sensor module and flanges. 36 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Installation July 2017 3.4.3 Prevent sediment deposits in the impulse piping. Maintain equal leg of head pressure on both legs of the impulse piping. Avoid conditions that might allow process fluid to freeze within the process flange. Process connections Coplanar or traditional process connection Install and tighten all four flange bolts before applying pressure, or process leakage will result. When properly installed, the flange bolts will protrude through the top of the sensor module housing. Do not attempt to loosen or remove the flange bolts while the transmitter is in service. Flange adapters Rosemount 2051DP and GP process connections on the transmitter flanges are 1/4--18 NPT. Flange adapters are available with standard 1/2--14 NPT Class 2 connections. The flange adapters allow users to disconnect from the process by removing the flange adapter bolts. Use plant-approved lubricant or sealant when making the process connections. Refer to "Dimensional drawings" on page 102 for the distance between pressure connections. This distance may be varied ±1/8-in. (3.2 mm) by rotating one or both of the flange adapters. To install adapters to a coplanar flange, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove the flange bolts. 2. Leaving the flange in place, move the adapters into position with the O-ring installed. 3. Clamp the adapters and the coplanar flange to the transmitter sensor module using the larger of the bolts supplied. 4. Tighten the bolts. Refer to "Flange bolts" on page 33 for torque specifications. Whenever you remove flanges or adapters, visually inspect the PTFE O-rings. Replace with O-ring designed for Rosemount transmitter if there are any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. Undamaged O-rings may be reused. If you replace the O-rings, retorque the flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow. Refer to the process sensor body reassembly procedure in Section 6: Troubleshooting. When compressed, PTFE O-rings tend to "cold flow," which aids in their sealing capabilities. Note PTFE O-rings should be replaced if the flange adapter is removed. Installation 37 Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA O-rings The two styles of Rosemount flange adapters (Rosemount 1151 and Rosemount 3051S/3051/2051) each require a unique O-ring. Use only the O-ring designed for the corresponding flange adapter. Failure to install proper flange adapter O-rings may cause process leaks, which can result in death or serious injury. The two flange adapters are distinguished by unique O-ring grooves. Only use the O-ring designed for its specific flange adapter, as shown below: Rosemount 3051S/3051/2051 A B C D Rosemount 1151 A B 3.4.4 C D A. Flange adapter B. O-ring C. PTFE-based profile (square) D. Elastomer profile (round) In-line process connection In-line gage transmitter orientation The low side pressure port on the in-line gage transmitter is located in the neck of the transmitter, behind the housing. The vent path is 360 degrees around the transmitter between the housing and sensor (See Figure 3-9). Keep the vent path free of any obstruction, such as paint, dust, and lubrication by mounting the transmitter so that the process can drain away. Figure 3-9. In-line Gage Low Side Pressure Port A A. Low side pressure port (atmospheric reference) 38 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Installation July 2017 3.5 Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds The Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold is available in two designs: traditional and coplanar. The traditional Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold can be mounted to most primary elements with mounting adapters in the market today. The Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold is used with the Rosemount 2051T In-line Transmitters to provide block-and-bleed valve capabilities of up to 10000 psi (690 bar). Figure 3-10. Manifolds Rosemount 2051C and Rosemount 304 Conventional Rosemount 2051C and Rosemount 305 Integral Coplanar Rosemount 2051C and Rosemount 305 Integral Traditional Rosemount 2051T and Rosemount 306 In-line 3.5.1 Installation Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold installation procedure To install a Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold to a Rosemount 2051 Transmitter: 1. Inspect the PTFE sensor module O-rings. Undamaged O-rings may be reused. If the O-rings are damaged (if they have nicks or cuts, for example), replace with O-rings designed for Rosemount transmitter. Important If replacing the O-rings, take care not to scratch or deface the O-ring grooves or the surface of the isolating diaphragm while you remove the damaged O-rings. 2. Install the Integral Manifold on the sensor module. Use the four 21/4-in. manifold bolts for alignment. Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross pattern to final torque value. See "Flange bolts" on page 33 for complete bolt installation information and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of the sensor module housing. 39 Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3. If the PTFE sensor module O-rings have been replaced, the flange bolts should be re-tightened after installation to compensate for cold flow of the O-rings. Note Always perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate mounting effects. Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold installation procedure The Rosemount 306 Manifold is for use only with a Rosemount 2051T In-line Transmitter. Assemble the Rosemount 306 Manifold to the Rosemount 2051T In-line Transmitter with a thread sealant. Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold installation procedure To install a Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold to a Rosemount 2051 Transmitter: 1. Align the conventional manifold with the transmitter flange. Use the four manifold bolts for alignment. 2. Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross pattern to final torque value. See "Flange bolts" on page 33 for complete bolt installation information and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of the sensor module housing. 3. Leak-check assembly to maximum pressure range of transmitter. Manifold operation Improper installation or operation of manifolds may result in process leaks, which may cause death or serious injury. Always perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate any shift due to mounting effects. See "Sensor trim overview" on page 66. Coplanar transmitters 3-valve and 5-valve manifolds Performing zero trim at static line pressure In normal operation the two isolate (block) valves between the process ports and H transmitter will be open and the equalize valve will be closed. Drain/Vent valve Isolate (open) Equalize (closed) L Drain/Vent valve Isolate (open) Process 40 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Installation July 2017 1. To zero trim the transmitter, close the isolate valve on the low side (downstream) side of the transmitter. H Drain/Vent valve Isolate (open) Equalize (closed) L Drain/Vent valve Isolate (closed) 2. Open the equalize valve to equalize the pressure on both sides of the H transmitter. The manifold is now in the proper configuration for performing a Drain/Vent zero trim on the transmitter. valve Isolate (open) Process Equalize (open) L Drain/Vent valve Isolate (closed) 3. After performing a zero trim on the transmitter, close the equalize valve. Process H L Drain/Vent valve Isolate (open) Equalize (closed) Drain/Vent valve Isolate (closed) 4. Finally, to return the transmitter to service, open the low side isolate valve. Process H L Drain/Vent valve Isolate (open) Equalize (closed) Process Drain/Vent valve Isolate (open) Installation 41 Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 5-valve natural gas manifold Performing zero trim at static line pressure 5-valve natural gas configurations shown: In normal operation, the two isolate (block) valves between the process ports and transmitter will be open, and the equalize valves will be closed. Vent valves may be opened or closed. H L (Plugged) Isolate (open) Equalize Equalize (closed) (closed) (Plugged) Isolate (open) 1. To zero trim the transmitter, first close the isolate valve on the low pressure (downstream) side of the transmitter and the vent valve. (Plugged) Process Drain vent Process (closed) H L (Plugged) Equalize Equalize (closed) (closed) Isolate (open) Isolate (closed) 2. Open the equalize valve on the high pressure (upstream) side of the transmitter. Process Drain vent Process (closed) H L (Plugged) Isolate (open) Equalize Equalize (open) (closed) (Plugged) Isolate (closed) 3. Open the equalize valve on the low pressure (downstream) side of the transmitter. The manifold is now in the proper configuration for performing a zero trim on the transmitter. Process Drain vent Process (closed) H L (Plugged) Isolate (open) Equalize Equalize (open) (open) (Plugged) Isolate (closed) Process Drain vent Process (closed) 42 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Installation July 2017 4. After performing a zero trim on the transmitter, close the equalize valve on the low pressure (downstream) side of the transmitter. (Plugged) H L Equalize Equalize (open) (closed) (Plugged) Isolate (open) Isolate (closed) 5. Close the equalize valve on the high pressure (upstream) side. Process Drain vent Process (closed) H L (Plugged) Isolate (open) (Plugged) Equalize Equalize (closed) (closed) Isolate (closed) Process Drain vent Process (closed) 6. Finally, to return the transmitter to service, open the low side isolate valve and H L vent valve. The vent valve can remain open or closed during operation. (Plugged) (Plugged) Equalize Equalize (closed) (closed) Isolate (open) Isolate (open) Process Drain vent Process (closed) In-line transmitters 2-valve and block and bleed style manifolds Isolating the transmitter In normal operation the isolate (block) valve between the process port and transmitter will be open and the test/vent valve will be closed. On a block and bleed style manifold, a single block valve provides transmitter isolation and a bleed screw provides drain/vent capabilities. Transmitter Vent (closed) Isolate Installation Process (open) 43 Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 1. To isolate the transmitter, close the isolate valve. Transmitter Vent (closed) Isolate 2. To bring the transmitter to atmospheric pressure, open the vent valve or bleed screw. Note A 1/4-in. male NPT pipe plug may be installed in the test/vent port and will need to be removed with a wrench in order to vent the manifold properly. Always use caution when venting directly to atmosphere. 3. After venting to atmosphere, perform any required calibration and then close the test/vent valve or replace the bleed screw. Process (closed) Transmitter Isolate Process (closed) Transmitter Vent (open) Vent (closed) 4. Open the Isolate (block) valve to return the transmitter to service. Isolate Process (closed) Transmitter Vent (closed) Isolate Process (open) 44 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Installation July 2017 Adjusting valve packing Over time, the packing material inside a Rosemount manifold may require adjustment in order to continue to provide proper pressure retention. Not all Rosemount manifolds have this adjustment capability. The Rosemount manifold model number will indicate what type of stem seal or packing material has been used. The following steps are provided as a procedure to adjust valve packing: 1. Remove all pressure from device. 2. Loosen manifold valve jam nut. 3. Tighten manifold valve packing adjuster nut 1/4 turn. 4. Tighten manifold valve jam nut. 5. Re-apply pressure and check for leaks. 6. Above steps can be repeated, if necessary. If the above procedure does not result in proper pressure retention, the complete manifold should be replaced. Figure 3-11. Valve Components 3.6 E A F D C G B A. Bonnet B. Ball seat C. Packing D. Stem E. Packing adjuster F. Jam nut G. Packing follower Liquid level measurement Differential pressure transmitters used for liquid level applications measure hydrostatic pressure head. Liquid level and specific gravity of a liquid are factors in determining pressure head. This pressure is equal to the liquid height above the tap multiplied by the specific gravity of the liquid. Pressure head is independent of volume or vessel shape. Installation 45 Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 3.6.1 3.6.2 Open vessels A pressure transmitter mounted near a tank bottom measures the pressure of the liquid above. Make a connection to the high pressure side of the transmitter, and vent the low pressure side to the atmosphere. Pressure head equals the liquid's specific gravity multiplied by the liquid height above the tap. Zero range suppression is required if the transmitter lies below the zero point of the desired level range. Figure 3-12 shows a liquid level measurement example. Closed vessels Pressure above a liquid affects the pressure measured at the bottom of a closed vessel. The liquid specific gravity multiplied by the liquid height plus the vessel pressure equals the pressure at the bottom of the vessel. To measure true level, the vessel pressure must be subtracted from the vessel bottom pressure. To do this, make a pressure tap at the top of the vessel and connect this to the low side of the transmitter. Vessel pressure is then equally applied to both the high and low sides of the transmitter. The resulting differential pressure is proportional to liquid height multiplied by the liquid specific gravity. Dry leg condition Low-side transmitter piping will remain empty if gas above the liquid does not condense. This is a dry leg condition. Range determination calculations are the same as those described for bottom-mounted transmitters in open vessels, as shown in Figure 3-12. Figure 3-12. Liquid Level Measurement Example Hi Zero X Range Suppression Y T Lo 0 90 inH2O 540 Let X equal the vertical distance between the minimum and maximum measurable levels (500-in.). Let Y equal the vertical distance between the transmitter datum line and the minimum measurable level (100-in.). Let SG equal the specific gravity of the fluid (0.9). Let h equal the maximum head pressure to be measured in inches of water. Let e equal head pressure produced by Y expressed in inches of water. Let Range equal e to e + h. Then h = (X)(SG) = 500 x 0.9 = 450 inH2O e = (Y)(SG) =100 x 0.9 = 90 inH2O Range = 90 to 540 inH2O 46 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Installation July 2017 Wet leg condition Condensation of the gas above the liquid slowly causes the low side of the transmitter piping to fill with liquid. The pipe is purposely filled with a convenient reference fluid to eliminate this potential error. This is a wet leg condition. The reference fluid will exert a head pressure on the low side of the transmitter. Zero elevation of the range must then be made. See Figure 3-13. Figure 3-13. Wet Leg Example X Z Y LT H L Let X equal the vertical distance between the minimum and maximum measurable levels (500-in.). Let Y equal the vertical distance between the transmitter datum line and the minimum measurable level (50-in.). Let z equal the vertical distance between the top of the liquid in the wet leg and the transmitter datum line (600-in.). Let SG1 equal the specific gravity of the fluid (1.0). Let SG2 equal the specific gravity of the fluid in the wet leg (1.1). Let h equal the maximum head pressure to be measured in inches of water. Let e equal the head pressure produced by Y expressed in inches of water. Let s equal head pressure produced by z expressed in inches of water. Let Range equal e -- s to h + e -- s. Then h = (X)(SG1) = 500 x 1.0 = 500 in H2O e = (Y)(SG1) = 50 x 1.0 = 50 inH2O s = (z)(SG2) = 600 x 1.1 = 660 inH2O Range = e -- s to h + e -- s. = 50 -- 660 to 500 + 50 -- 660 = --610 to --110 inH2O Zero elevation Hi Range --610 inH2O --110 Lo 0 Installation 47 Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Bubbler system in open vessel A bubbler system that has a top-mounted pressure transmitter can be used in open vessels. This system consists of an air supply, pressure regulator, constant flow meter, pressure transmitter, and a tube that extends down into the vessel. Bubble air through the tube at a constant flow rate. The pressure required to maintain flow equals the liquid's specific gravity multiplied by the vertical height of the liquid above the tube opening. Figure 3-14 shows a bubbler liquid level measurement example. Figure 3-14. Bubbler Liquid Level Measurement Example Air T X Lo Let X equal the vertical distance between the minimum and maximum measurable levels (100-in.). Let SG equal the specific gravity of the fluid (1.1). Let h equal the maximum head pressure to be measured in inches of water. Let Range equal zero to h. Then h = (X)(SG) = 100 x 1.1 = 110 inH2O Range = 0 to 110 inH2O Hi Range 0 inH2O 110 48 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Section 4 Electrical Installation Electrical Installation July 2017 4.1 4.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Local Operating Interface (LOI)/LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Configure security and simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50 Setting transmitter alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 53 Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 54 Overview The information in this section covers installation considerations for the RosemountTM 2051 Pressure Transmitter with HART® Protocol. A Quick Start Guide is shipped with every transmitter to describe pipe-fitting, wiring procedures and basic configuration for initial installation. Safety messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol. Explosions could result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Review the approvals section of this Reference Manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. In an Explosion-Proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power is applied to the unit. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. 4.3 Local Operating Interface (LOI)/LCD display Transmitters ordered with the LCD display option (M5) or LOI option (M4) are shipped with the display installed. Installing the display on an existing transmitter requires a small instrument screwdriver. Carefully align the desired display connector with the electronics board connector. If connectors don't align, the display and electronics board are not compatible. Electrical Installation 49 Electrical Installation July 2017 Figure 4-1. LCD Display A B Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA C 4.3.1 4.4 A. Jumpers (top and bottom) B. LCD display C. Extended cover Rotating LOI/LCD display 1. Secure the loop to manual control and remove power to transmitter. 2. Remove transmitter housing cover. 3. Remove screws form the LCD/LOI display and rotate to desired orientation. a. Insert 10 pin connector into the display board for the correct orientation. Carefully align pins for insertion into the output board. 4. Re-insert screws. 5. Re-attach transmitter housing cover; cover must be fully engaged to comply with explosion proof requirements. 6. Re-attach power and return loop to automatic control. Configure security and simulation There are four security methods with the Rosemount 2051 Transmitter. Security switch HART Lock Configuration buttons lock LOI password 50 Electrical Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure 4-2. 4--20 mA Electronics Board without LCD meter A B Electrical Installation July 2017 with LCD display 4.4.1 4.4.2 A. Alarm B. Security Note 1-5 Vdc Alarm and Security switches are located in the same location as 4-20 mA output boards. Security switch The security switch is used to prevent changes to the transmitter configuration data. If the security switch is set to the locked location ( ), any transmitter configuration requests sent via HART, LOI, or local configuration buttons will be rejected by the transmitter and the transmitter configuration data will not be modified. See figure above for the location of the security switch. Follow the steps below to enable the security switch. 1. Set loop to manual and remove power. 2. Remove transmitter housing cover. 3. Use a small screwdriver to slide the switch to the lock ( ) position. 4. Replace transmitter housing cover; cover must be fully engaged to comply with explosion proof requirements. HART Lock The HART Lock prevents changes to the transmitter configuration from all sources; all changes requested via HART, LOI, and local configuration buttons will be rejected. The HART Lock can only be set via HART communication, and is only available in HART Revision 7 mode. The HART Lock can be enabled or disabled with a Field Communicator or AMS Device Manager. Electrical Installation 51 Electrical Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 4.4.3 Configuring HART Lock using Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the fast key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 2, 6, 4 Configuring HART Lock using AMS device Manager 1. Right click on the device and select Configure. 2. Under Manual Setup select the Security tab. 3. Select Lock/Unlock button under HART Lock (Software) and follow the screen prompts. Configuration button lock The configuration button lock disables all local button functionality. Changes to the transmitter configuration from the LOI and local buttons will be rejected. Local external keys can be locked via HART communication only. Configuring configuration button lock using a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the fast key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 2, 6, 3 Configuring configuration button lock using AMS device Manager 1. Right click on the device and select Configure. 2. Under Manual Setup select the Security tab. 3. Within the Configuration Buttons dropdown menu select Disabled to lock external local keys. 4. Select Send. 5. Confirm service reason and select Yes. 52 Electrical Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electrical Installation July 2017 4.4.4 LOI password A Local Operator Interface Password can be entered and enabled to prevent review and modification of device configuration via the LOI. This does not prevent configuration from HART or external keys (analog zero and span; Digital Zero Trim). The LOI password is a 4 digit code that is to be set by the user. If the password is lost or forgotten the master password is "9307". The LOI password can be configured and enabled/disabled by HART Communication via a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or the LOI. Configuring LOI password with Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys 2, 2, 6, 5, 2 Configuring LOI password with AMS Device Manager 1. Right click on the device and select Configure. 2. Under Manual Setup select the Security tab. 3. Within the Local Operator Interface select the Configure Password button and follow the screen prompts. Configuring LOI password using LOI Figure 4-3. Local Operator Interface password VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN P TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU PASSWORD PASSWORD ENABLE CHANGE PASSWORD BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU 4.5 Setting transmitter alarm On the electronics board is an alarm switch, reference Figure 4-2 on page 51 for switch location. Follow the steps below to change the alarm switch location: 1. Set loop to manual and remove power. 2. Remove transmitter housing cover. 3. Use a small screwdriver to slide switch to desired position. 4. Replace transmitter cover; cover must be fully engaged to comply with explosion proof requirements. Electrical Installation 53 Electrical Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 4.6 Electrical considerations Note Make sure all electrical installation is in accordance with national and local code requirements. 4.6.1 Do not run signal wiring in conduit or open trays with power wiring or near heavy electrical equipment. Conduit installation Recommended conduit connections are shown in Figure 4-4. If all connections are not sealed, excess moisture accumulation can damage the transmitter. Make sure to mount the transmitter with the electrical housing positioned downward for drainage. To avoid moisture accumulation in the housing, install wiring with a drip loop, and ensure the bottom of the drip loop is mounted lower than the conduit connections or the transmitter housing. Figure 4-4. Conduit Installation Correct A Correct Incorrect A 4.6.2 54 B B A A. Possible conduit line positions B. Sealing compound Power supply 4--20 mA HART (option code A) Transmitter operates on 10.5--42.4 Vdc at the terminal of the transmitter. The DC power supply should provide power with less than two percent ripple. A minimum of 16.6 V is required for loops with a 250 resistance. Note A minimum loop resistance of 250 is required to communicate with a Field Communicator. If a single power supply is used to power more than one Rosemount 2051 Transmitter, the power supply used, and circuitry common to the transmitters, should not have more that 20 of impedance at 1200 Hz. Electrical Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electrical Installation July 2017 Figure 4-5. Load Limitation Maximum loop resistance = 43.5 x (power supply voltage -- 10.5) The Field Communicator requires a minimum loop resistance of 250 for communication. Load (s) 1387 1000 500 Operating region 0 10.5 20 30 Voltage (Vdc) 42.4 4.6.3 The total resistance load is the sum of the resistance of the signal leads and the load resistance of the controller, indicator, I.S. Barriers, and related pieces. If intrinsic safety barriers are used, the resistance and voltage drop must be included. 1--5 Vdc low power HART (output code M) Low power transmitters operate on 9--28 Vdc. The DC power supply should provide power with less than 2 percent ripple. The Vout load should be 100 k or greater. Wiring the transmitter Do not connect the power signal wiring to the test terminals. Incorrect wiring can damage test circuit. Note Use shielded twisted pairs to yield best results. To ensure proper communication, use 24 AWG or larger wire and do not exceed 5000 ft. (1500 m). For 1--5 V 500 ft. (150 m) maximum are recommended. unpaired three conductor or two twisted pairs is recommended. Figure 4-6. Wiring the Transmitter (4--20 mA HART) B A A. DC power supply B. RL 250 (necessary for HART Communication only) Electrical Installation 55 Electrical Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure 4-7. Wiring the Transmitter (1--5 Vdc Low Power) A B 4.6.4 56 A. DC power supply B. Voltmeter Perform the following procedure to make wiring connections: 1. Remove the housing cover on terminal compartment side. Do not remove the cover in explosive atmospheres when the circuit is live. Signal wiring supplies all power to the transmitter. 2. For 4--20 mA HART Output, connect the positive lead to the terminal marked (pwr/comm+) and the negative lead to the terminal marked (pwr/comm--). Do not connect the powered signal wiring to the test terminals. Power could damage the test diode. a. For 1--5 Vdc HART Output, connect the positive lead to (PWR +) and the negative to the (PWR--). Do not connect the powered signal wiring to the test terminals. Power could damage the test diode. 3. Plug and seal unused conduit connection on the transmitter housing to avoid moisture accumulation in the terminal side. Grounding the transmitter Signal cable shield grounding Signal cable shield grounding is summarized in Figure 4-8 on page 57. The signal cable shield and unused shield drain wire must be trimmed and insulated, ensuring that the signal cable shield and drain wire do not come in contact with the transmitter case. See "Transmitter case grounding" on page 57 for instructions on grounding the transmitter case. Follow the steps below to correctly ground the signal cable shield. 1. Remove the field terminals housing cover. 2. Connect the signal wire pair at the field terminals as indicated in Figure 4-6. 3. At the field terminals, the cable shield and shield drain wire should be trimmed close and insulated from transmitter housing. 4. Reattach the field terminals housing cover; cover must be fully engaged to comply with explosion proof requirements. 5. At terminations outside the transmitter housing, the cable shield drain wire should be continuously connected. Electrical Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electrical Installation July 2017 a. Prior to the termination point, any exposed shield drain wire should be insulated as shown in Figure 4-8 (B). 6. Properly terminate the signal cable shield drain wire to an earth ground at or near the power supply. Figure 4-8. Wiring Pair and Ground A DP C B A. Insulate Shield and shield drain wire B. Insulate exposed shield drain wire C. Terminate cable shield drain wire to earth ground Transmitter case grounding Always ground the transmitter case in accordance with national and local electrical codes. The most effective transmitter case grounding method is a direct connection to earth ground with minimal impedance. Methods for grounding the transmitter case include: Internal ground connection: The internal ground connection screw is inside the FIELD TERMINALS side of the electronics housing. This screw is identified by a ground symbol ( ). The ground connection screw is standard on all Rosemount 2051 Transmitters. Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 58. External ground connection: The external ground connection is located on the exterior of the transmitter housing. Refer to Figure 4-10 on page 58. This connection is only available with option V5 and T1. Electrical Installation 57 Electrical Installation July 2017 Figure 4-9. Internal Ground Connection A Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A. Internal ground location Figure 4-10. External Ground Connection (Option V5 or T1) A A. External ground location Note Grounding the transmitter case via threaded conduit connection may not provide sufficient ground continuity. Transient protection terminal block grounding The transmitter can withstand electrical transients of the energy level usually encountered in static discharges or induced switching transients. However, high-energy transients, such as those induced in wiring from nearby lightning strikes, can damage the transmitter. The transient protection terminal block can be ordered as an installed option (code T1) or as a spare part to retrofit existing Rosemount 2051 Transmitters in the field. See "Spare parts" on page 145 for part numbers. The lightning bolt symbol shown in Figure 4-11 on page 59 identifies the transient protection terminal block. 58 Electrical Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure 4-11. Transient Protection Terminal Block A Electrical Installation July 2017 A. Lightning bolt location Note The transient protection terminal block does not provide transient protection unless the transmitter case is properly grounded. Use the guidelines to ground the transmitter case. Refer to Figure 4-11. Electrical Installation 59 Electrical Installation July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 60 Electrical Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Section 5 Operation and Maintenance July 2017 Operation and Maintenance 5.1 5.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 61 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 61 Recommended calibration tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 62 Calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 62 Trim the pressure signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 66 Trim the analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 69 Switching HART Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 72 Overview This section contains information on calibrating RosemountTM 2051 Pressure Transmitters. Field Communicator, AMSTM, Device Manager and Local Operator Interface (LOI) instructions are given to perform configuration functions. Safety messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol. Explosions could result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Review the approvals section of the Rosemount 2051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices. In an Explosion-proof/flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power is applied to the unit. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. Operation and Maintenance 61 Operation and Maintenance July 2017 5.3 Recommended calibration tasks Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 5.4 62 Absolute pressure transmitters (Rosemount 2051CA and 2051TA) are calibrated at the factory. Trimming adjusts the position of the factory characterization curve. It is possible to degrade performance of the transmitter if any trim is done improperly or with inaccurate equipment. Table 5-1. Basic and Full Calibration Tasks Field installation tasks Bench calibration tasks 1. Perform sensor zero/lower trim: Compensate for mounting pressure effects. a. Refer to Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds for operation instructions to properly drain/vent valves 2. Set/check basic configuration parameters. a. Output units b. Range points c. Output type d. Damping Value 1. Perform optional 4--20 mA 1--5 Vdc output trim. 2. Perform a sensor trim. a. Zero/lower trim using line pressure effect correction. Reference Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds for drain/vent valve operation instructions. b. Optional full scale trim. Sets the span of the device and requires accurate calibration equipment. c. Set/check basic configuration parameters. Note For Rosemount 2051CA, 2051TA range 0 and range 5 devices, an accurate absolute pressure source is required. Calibration overview The Rosemount 2051 Transmitter is an accurate instrument that is fully calibrated in the factory. Field calibration is provided to the user to meet plant requirements or industry standards. Complete calibration of the transmitter can be split into two halves: sensor calibration and analog output calibration. Sensor calibration allows the user to adjust the pressure (digital value) reported by the transmitter to be equal to a pressure standard. The sensor calibration can adjust the pressure offset to correct for mounting conditions or line pressure effects. This correction is recommended. The calibration of the pressure range (pressure span or gain correction) requires accurate pressure standards (sources) to provide a full calibration. Like the sensor calibration, the analog output can be calibrated to match the user measurement system. The analog output trim (4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim) will calibrate the loop at the 4 mA (1 V) and 20 mA (5 V) points. The sensor calibration and the analog output calibration combine to match the transmitter's measurement system to the plant standard. Calibrate the sensor Sensor trim (page 67) Zero trim (page 67) Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Operation and Maintenance July 2017 5.4.1 Calibrate the 4--20 mA output 4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim (page 70) 4--20 mA/1--5V output trim using other scale (page 71) Determining necessary sensor trims Bench calibrations allow for calibrating the instrument for its desired range of operation. Straight forward connections to pressure source allow for a full calibration at the planned operating points. Exercising the Transmitter over the desired pressure range allows for verification of the analog output. "Trim the pressure signal" on page 66 discusses how the trim operations change the calibration. It is possible to degrade the performance of the transmitter if a trim is done improperly or with inaccurate equipment. The transmitter can be set back to factory settings using the recall factory trim command in "Recall factory trimsensor trim" on page 68. For transmitters that are field installed, the manifolds discussed in Section 3: Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds allow the differential transmitter to be zeroed using the zero trim function. Both 3-valve and 5-valve manifolds are discussed. This field calibration will eliminate any pressure offsets caused by mounting effects (head effect of the oil fill) and static pressure effects of the process. Determine the necessary trims with the following steps: 1. Apply pressure 2. Check digital pressure, if the digital pressure does not match the applied pressure, perform a digital trim. See "Perform a sensor trim" on page 67. 3. Check reported analog output against the live analog output. If they do not match, perform an analog output trim. See "Performing digital-to-analog trim (4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim)" on page 70. Trimming with configuration buttons Local configuration buttons are external buttons located underneath the top tag of the transmitter. There are two possible sets of local configuration buttons that can be ordered and used to perform trim operations: Digital zero trim and LOI. To access the buttons, loosen screw and rotate top tag until buttons are visible. LOI (M4): Can perform both digital sensor trim and the 4--20mA output trim (analog output trim). Follow the same procedures listed in trimming with Field Communicator or AMS Device Manager listed below. Digital zero trim (DZ): Used for performing a sensor zero trim. See "Determining calibration frequency" on page 64 for trim instructions. All configuration changes should be monitored by a display or by measuring the loop output. Figure 5-1 shows the physical differences between the two sets of buttons. Figure 5-1. Local Configuration Button Options LOIgreen retainer Digital zero trimblue retainer Operation and Maintenance 63 Operation and Maintenance July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 5.4.2 Determining calibration frequency Calibration frequency can vary greatly depending on the application, performance requirements, and process conditions. Use the following procedure to determine calibration frequency that meets the needs of your application: 1. Determine the performance required for your application. 2. Determine the operating conditions. 3. Calculate the Total Probable Error (TPE). 4. Calculate the stability per month. 5. Calculate the calibration frequency. Sample calculation for Rosemount 2051 Step 1: Determine the performance required for your application. Required Performance: Step 2: Determine the operating conditions. 0.30% of span Transmitter: Calibrated span: Ambient temperature change: Line pressure: Step 3: Calculate TPE. Rosemount 2051CD, range 2 (URL=250 inH2O[623 mbar]) 150 inH2O (374 mbar) ± 50 °F (28 °C) 500 psig (34,5 bar) TPE = Where: (Reference accuracy)2 + (Temperature effect)2 + (Static pressure 2 effect) = 0.189% of span Reference accuracy = ± 0.065% of span Ambient temperature effect = Span static pressure effect(1) = ---0---.--0----2S---5-p----a----n-U-----R----L--- + 0.125 % per 50 °F = 0.167% of span 0.1% reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) = 0.05% of span at maximum span 1. Zero static pressure effect removed by zero trimming at line pressure. Step 4: Calculate the stability per month. Stability = ---0---.--1----0S---0-p----a----n-U-----R----L--- % of span for 2 years = 0.0069% of URL for 1 month Step 5: Calculate calibration frequency. Cal. Freq. = ---R----e--S-q---t.--a-P--b--e-i--rl-i-f-t-o-y--r--p-m---e--a-r--n--M--c--e-o---n----t--hT---P----E---- = ---0----.-3---0-%--.--0----0--0-6---.-9-1--%-8---9----%----- = 16xmonths Sample calculation for Rosemount 2051C with P8 option (0.05% accuracy and 5-year stability) Step 1: Determine the performance required for your application. Required performance: 0.30% of span 64 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Operation and Maintenance July 2017 5.4.3 Step 2: Determine the operating conditions. Transmitter: Calibrated span: Ambient temperature change: Line pressure: Rosemount 2051CD, range 2 (URL=250 inH2[623 mbar]) 150 inH2O (374 mbar) ±50 °F (28 °C) 500 psig (34,5 bar) Step 3: Calculate TPE. TPE = Where: (Reference accuracy)2 + (Temperature effect)2 + (Static pressure 2 effect) = 0.117% of span Reference accuracy = ± 0.05% of span Ambient temperature effect = Span static pressure effect(1) = ---0---.--0----2S---5-p----a----n-U-----R----L--- + 0.125 % per 50 °F = 0.0833% of span 0.1% reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) = 0.05% of span at maximum span 1. Zero static pressure effect removed by zero trimming at line pressure. Step 4: Calculate the stability per month. Stability = ---0---.--1----2S---5-p----a----n-U-----R----L--- % of span for 5 years = 0.0035% of URL for 1 month Step 5: Calculate calibration frequency. Cal. Freq. = ---R----e--S-q---t.--a-P--b--e-i--rl-i-f-t-o-y--r--p-m---e--a-r--n--M--c---eo---n----t--hT---P----E---- = ---0---.--3---0-%--.--0----0--0-3---.-5-1---%1---7----%----- = 52months Compensating for span line pressure effects (range 4 and range 5) Rosemount 2051 Range 4 and 5 Pressure Transmitters require a special calibration procedure when used in differential pressure applications. The purpose of this procedure is to optimize transmitter performance by reducing the effect of static line pressure in these applications. The transmitters (ranges 0 through 3) do not require this procedure because optimization occurs at the sensor. The systematic span shift caused by the application of static line pressure is --0.95 percent of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for range 4 transmitters, and --1 percent of reading per 1000psi (69 bar) for range 5 transmitters. Using the following procedure, the span effect can be corrected to ±0.2 percent of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 3626 psi (0 to 250 bar). Use the following example to compute correct input values. Example A range 4 differential pressure HART® transmitter (Rosemount 2051CD4...) will be used in an application with a static line pressure of 1200 psi (83 bar). The transmitter output is ranged with 4 mA at 500 inH2O (1, 2 bar) and 20 mA at 1500 inH2O (3, 7 bar). To correct for systematic error caused by high static line pressure, first use the following formulas to determine the corrected values for the high trim value. Operation and Maintenance 65 Operation and Maintenance July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA High Trim Value: HT = (URV -- [S/100 x P/1000 x LRV]) Where: HT = URV = S = P = Corrected High Trim Value Upper Range Value Span shift per specification (as a percent of reading) Static Line Pressure in psi In this example: URV = S = P = LT = LT = 1500 inH2O (3.74 bar) --0.95% 1200 psi 1500 -- (--0.95%/100 x 1200 psi/1000 psi x 1500 inH2O) 1517.1 inH2O Complete the upper sensor trim procedure as described in "Perform a sensor trim" on page 67. In the example above, at step 4, apply the nominal pressure value of 1500 inH2O. However, enter the calculated correct upper sensor trim value of 1517.1 inH2O with a Field Communicator. Note The range values for the 4 and 20 mA points should be at the nominal URV and LRV. In the example above, the values are 1500 inH2O and 500 inH2O respectively. Confirm the values on the HOME screen of the Field Communicator. Modify, Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements, by following the steps in "Rerange the transmitter" on page 15. 5.5 5.5.1 66 Trim the pressure signal Sensor trim overview A sensor trim corrects the pressure offset and pressure range to match a pressure standard. The upper sensor trim corrects the pressure range and the lower sensor trim (zero trim) corrects the pressure offset. an accurate pressure standard is required for full calibration. a zero trim can be performed if the process is vented, or the high and low side pressure are equal (for differential pressure transmitters). Zero trim is a single-point offset adjustment. It is useful for compensating for mounting position effects and is most effective when performed with the transmitter installed in its final mounting position. Since this correction maintains the slope of the characterization curve, it should not be used in place of a Sensor Trim over the full sensor range. When performing a zero trim, ensure that the equalizing valve is open and all wet legs are filled to the correct levels. Line pressure should be applied to the transmitter during a zero trim to eliminate line pressure errors. Refer to Section 3: Manifold operation. Note Do not perform a zero trim on Rosemount 2051T Absolute Pressure Transmitters. Zero trim is zero based, and absolute pressure transmitters reference absolute zero. To correct mounting position effects on a transmitter, perform a low trim within the sensor trim function. The low trim function provides an offset correction similar to the zero trim function, but it does not require zero-based input. Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Operation and Maintenance July 2017 Upper and lower sensor trim is a two-point sensor calibration where two end-point pressures are applied, all output is linearized between them, and requires an accurate pressure source. Always adjust the low trim value first to establish the correct offset. Adjustment of the high trim value provides a slope correction to the characterization curve based on the low trim value. The trim values help optimize performance over a specific measurement range. Figure 5-2. Sensor Trim Example A B A B 5.5.2 A. Before trim B. After trim Perform a sensor trim When performing a sensor trim, but the upper and lower limits can be trimmed. If both upper and lower trims are to be performed, the lower trim must be done prior to the upper time. Note Use a pressure input source that is at least four times more accurate than the transmitter, and allow the input pressure to stabilize for 10 seconds before entering any values. Performing a sensor trim with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow the steps within the Field Communicator to complete the Sensor Trim. Device Dashboard Fast Keys 3, 4, 1 To calibrate the sensor with a Field Communicator using the sensor trim function, perform the following procedure: 1. Select Lower Sensor Trim. Note Select pressure points so that lower and upper values are equal to or outside the expected process operation range. This can be done by going to "Rerange the transmitter" on page 15 of Section 2: Configuration. Operation and Maintenance 67 Operation and Maintenance July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 5.5.3 2. Follow the commands provided by the Field Communicator to complete the adjustment of the lower value. 3. Repeat the procedure for the upper value, replacing 2: Lower Sensor Trim with 3: Upper Sensor Trim in Step 1. Performing a sensor trim with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and, under the Method dropdown menu, move cursor over Calibrate and, under Sensor Trim, select Lower Sensor Trim. 1. Follow the screen prompts to perform a Sensor Trim using AMS Device Manager. 2. If desired, right click on the device and under the Method dropdown menu, move cursor over Calibrate and under Sensor Trim and select Upper Sensor Trim Performing a sensor trim using LOI Perform an upper and lower sensor trim by referencing Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3. Sensor Trim with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU CALIBRAT ZERO TRIM LOWER TRIM UPPER TRIM ANALOG TRIM FACTORY RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU Performing a digital zero trim (option DZ) A digital zero trim (option DZ) provides the same function as a zero/lower sensor trim, but can be completed in hazardous areas at any given time by simply pushing the zero trim button when the transmitter is at zero pressure. If the transmitter is not close enough to zero when the button is pushed, the command may fail due to excess correction. If ordered, a digital zero Trim can be performed by utilizing external configuration buttons located underneath the top tag of the transmitter, see Figure 5-1 on page 63 for DZ button location. 1. Loosen the top tag of the transmitter to expose buttons. 2. Press and hold the digital zero button for at least two seconds, then release to perform a digital zero trim. Recall factory trimsensor trim The recall factory trimsensor trim command allows the restoration of the as-shipped factory settings of the sensor trim. This command can be useful for recovering from an inadvertent zero trim of an absolute pressure unit or inaccurate pressure source. 68 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Operation and Maintenance July 2017 Recalling factory trim with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow the steps within the Field Communicator to complete the sensor trim. Device Dashboard Fast Keys 3, 4, 3 Recalling factory trim with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and, under the Method dropdown menu, move cursor over Calibrate and select Restore Factory Calibration. 1. Select Next after setting the control loop to manual. 2. Select Sensor Trim under Trim to recall and select Next. 3. Follow the screen prompts to recall sensor trim. Recalling factory trim - sensor trim using LOI Refer to Figure 5-4 to recall factory sensor trim. Figure 5-4. Recall Factory Trim - Sensor Trim with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU CALIBRAT ZERO TRIM LOWER TRIM UPPER TRIM ANALOG TRIM FACTORY RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU FACTORY RECALL SENSOR RECALL ANALOG RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU 5.6 Trim the analog output The analog output trim commands allow you to adjust the transmitter's current output at the 4 and 20 mA points to match the plant standards. This trim is performed after the digital to analog conversion so only the 4--20mA analog signal will be affected. Figure 5-5 graphically shows the two ways the characterization curve is affected when an analog output trim is performed. Operation and Maintenance 69 Operation and Maintenance July 2017 Figure 5-5. Analog Output Trim Example A B Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A B 5.6.1 A. Before trim B. After Trim mA Output mA Output Performing digital-to-analog trim (4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim) Note If a resistor is added to the loop, ensure that the power supply is sufficient to power the transmitter to a 20 mA output with additional loop resistance. Refer to "Power supply" on page 54. Performing a 4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow the steps within the Field Communicator to complete the 4--20 mA output trim. Device Dashboard Fast Keys 3, 4, 2, 1 Performing a 4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and, under the Method drop down menu, move cursor over Calibrate and select Analog Calibration. 1. Select Digital to Analog Trim. 2. Follow the screen prompts to perform a 4--20 mA output trim. 70 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Operation and Maintenance July 2017 Performing 4--20mA/1--5 V output trim using LOI Figure 5-6. 4--20mA Output Trim Using LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU CALIBRAT ZERO TRIM LOWER TRIM UPPER TRIM ANALOG TRIM FACTORY RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU 5.6.2 5.6.3 Performing digital-to-analog trim (4--20mA/1--5 V output trim) using other scale The Scaled 4--20 mA output Trim command matches the 4 and 20 mA points to a user selectable reference scale other than 4 and 20 mA (for example, 2 to 10 volts if measuring across a 500 load, or 0 to 100 percent if measuring from a Distributed Control System [DCS]). To perform a scaled 4--20 mA output trim, connect an accurate reference meter to the transmitter and trim the output signal to scale, as outlined in the output trim procedure. Performing a 4--20/ 1--5 V mA output trim using other scale with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow the steps within the Field Communicator to complete the 4--20 mA output trim using other scale. Device Dashboard Fast Keys 3, 4, 2, 2 Performing a 4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim using other scale with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and under the Method dropdown menu, move cursor over Calibrate and select Analog Calibration. 1. Select Scaled Digital to Analog Trim. 2. Follow screen prompts to perform a 4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim. Recalling factory trimanalog output The recall factory trimanalog output command allows the restoration of the as-shipped factory settings of the analog output trim. This command can be useful for recovering from an inadvertent trim, incorrect plant standard or faulty meter. Operation and Maintenance 71 Operation and Maintenance July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Recalling factory trim - analog output with a Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow the steps within the Field Communicator to complete the digital to analog trim using other scale. Device Dashboard Fast Keys 3, 4, 3 Recalling factory trim - analog output with AMS Device Manager Right click on the device and, under the Method drop down menu, move cursor over Calibrate and select Restore Factory Calibration. 1. Select Next to set the control loop to manual. 2. Select Analog Output Trim under Select trim to recall and select Next. 3. Follow screen prompts to recall analog output trim. Recalling factory trim - analog output with LOI Reference Figure 5-7 for LOI instructions. Figure 5-7. Recall Factory Trim -- analog output with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU CALIBRAT ZERO TRIM LOWER TRIM UPPER TRIM ANALOG TRIM FACTORY RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU FACTORY RECALL SENSOR RECALL ANALOG RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU 5.7 5.7.1 Switching HART Revision Some systems are not capable of communicating with HART Revision 7 devices. The following procedures list how to change HART Protocol revisions between HART Revision 7 and HART Revision 5. Switching HART Revision with generic menu If the HART Protocol configuration tool is not capable of communicating with a HART Revision 7 device, it should load a generic menu with limited capability. The following procedures allow for switching between HART Revision 7 and HART Revision 5 from a generic menu. 1. Locate "Message" field a. To change to HART Revision 5, Enter: HART5 in the message field b. To change to HART Revision 7, Enter: HART7 in the message field 72 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Operation and Maintenance July 2017 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 Switching HART Revision with Field Communicator From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow steps within the Field Communicator to complete the HART revision change. From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys HART5 2, 2, 5, 2, 4 HART7 2, 2, 5, 2, 3 Switching HART Revision with AMS Device Manager 1. Select on Manual Setup and select HART. 2. Select Change HART Revision then follow the on screen prompts. Note AMS Device Manager versions 10.5 or greater are compatible with HART Revision 7. Switching HART Revision with LOI Navigate to HART REV within the extended menu and select if either HART REV 5 or HART REV 7. Use Figure 5-8 below to change HART Revision: Figure 5-8. Change HART Revision with LOI VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU Operation and Maintenance 73 Operation and Maintenance July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 74 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Section 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting July 2017 6.1 6.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75 Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 77 Disassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 80 Reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 81 Overview Table 6-1 provides summarized maintenance and troubleshooting suggestions for the most common operating problems. If you suspect malfunction despite the absence of any diagnostic messages on the Field Communicator display, consider using Section 6: Diagnostic messages on page 77 to identify any potential problem. Safety messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol. Explosions could result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Review the approvals section of the RosemountTM 2051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices. In an Explosion-proof/flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power is applied to the unit. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. Troubleshooting 75 Troubleshooting July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table 6-1. Rosemount 2051 Troubleshooting Table for 4--20 mA Output Symptom Transmitter milliamp reading is zero Transmitter Not Communicating with Field Communicator Transmitter milliamp reading is low or high Transmitter will not respond to changes in applied pressure Digital Pressure Variable reading is low or high Digital Pressure Variable reading is erratic Milliamp reading is erratic Corrective actions Verify terminal voltage is 10.5 to 42.4 Vdc at signal terminals Check power wires for reversed polarity Check that power wires are connected to signal terminals Check for open diode across test terminal Verify terminal voltage is 10.5 to 42.4 Vdc Check loop resistance, 250 minimum (PS voltage -transmitter voltage/loop current) Check that power wires are connected to signal terminals and not test terminals Verify clean DC Power to transmitter (Max AC noise 0.2 volts peak to peak) Verify the output is between 4 and 20 mA or saturation levels Have Field Communicator poll for all addresses Verify applied pressure Verify 4 and 20 mA range points Verify output is not in alarm condition Perform analog trim Check that power wires are connected to the correct signal terminals (positive to positive, negative to negative) and not the test terminal Check impulse piping or manifold for blockage Verify applied pressure is between the 4 and 20 mA points Verify the output is not in alarm condition Verify transmitter is not in loop test mode Verify transmitter is not in multidrop mode Check test equipment Check impulse piping for blockage or low fill in wet leg Verify transmitter is calibrated properly Check test equipment (verify accuracy) Verify pressure calculations for application Check application for faulty equipment in pressure line Verify transmitter is not reacting directly to equipment turning on/off Verify damping is set properly for application Verify power source to transmitter has adequate voltage and current Check for external electrical interference Verify transmitter is properly grounded Verify shield for twisted pair is only grounded at one end 76 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Troubleshooting July 2017 6.3 Diagnostic messages 6.3.1 Listed in the below sections are detailed table of the possible messages that will appear on either the LOI/LCD display, a Field Communicator, or an AMS® Device Manager system. Use the tables below to diagnose particular status messages. Good Failed -- fix now Maintenance -- fix soon Advisory Diagnostic message: Failed - fix now Table 6-2. Status: Failed -- Fix Now Alert name No Pressure Updates LCD screen NO P UPDATE Electronics Board Failure FAIL BOARD Critical Sensor MEMRY Data Error ERROR Critical Electronics Data Error Sensor Failure FAIL SENSOR Incompatible Electronics and Sensor XMTR MSMTCH LOI screen NO PRESS UPDATE FAIL BOARD MEMORY ERROR FAIL SENSOR XMTR MSMTCH Problem There are no pressure updates from the sensor to the electronics A failure has been detected in the electronics circuit board A user written parameter does not match the expected value A user written parameter does not match the expected value A failure has been detected in the pressure sensor The pressure sensor is incompatible with the attached electronics Recommended action 1. Ensure the sensor cable connection to the electronics is tight. 2. Replace the pressure sensor. 1. Replace the electronics board. 1. Confirm and correct all parameters listed in Device Information. 2. Perform a Device Reset. 3. Replace sensor module. 1. Confirm and correct all parameters listed in Device Information. 2. Perform a Device Reset. 3. Replace electronics board. 1. Replace the pressure sensor. 1. Replace the electronics board or sensor with compatible hardware. Troubleshooting 77 Troubleshooting July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 6.3.2 Diagnostic message: Maintenance - fix soon Table 6-3. Status: Maintenance -- Fix Soon Alert name No Temperature Updates Pressure Out of Limits Sensor Temperature Beyond Limits Electronics Temperature Beyond Limits Electronics Board Parameter Error Configuration Buttons Operator Error LCD screen NO T UPDATE PRES LIMITS TEMP LIMITS MEMRY WARN (also in advisory) STUCK BUTTON LOI screen NO TEMP UPDATE PRES OUT LIMITS TEMP OUT LIMITS MEMORY WARN (also in advisory) STUCK BUTTON Problem There are no temperature updates from the sensor to the electronics The pressure is either above or below the sensor limits The sensor temperature has exceeded its safe operating range The temperature of the electronics has exceeded its safe operating range. A device parameter does not match the expected value. The error does not affect transmitter operation or analog output. Device is not responding to button presses. Recommended action 1. Ensure the sensor cable connection to the electronics is tight. 2. Replace the pressure sensor. 1. Check the transmitter pressure connection to ensure it is not plugged or the isolating diaphragms are not damaged. 2. Replace the pressure sensor. 1. Check the process and ambient conditions are within --85 to 194 °F (--65 to 90 °C). 2. Replace the pressure sensor. 1. Confirm electronics temperature is within limits of -- 85 to 194 °F (--65 to 90 °C). 2. Replace electronics board. 1. Replace the electronics board. 1. Check configuration buttons are not stuck. 2. Replace the electronics board. 78 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Troubleshooting July 2017 6.3.3 Diagnostic message: Advisory Table 6-4. Status: Advisory Alert name Non-Critical User Data Warning Sensor Parameter Warning LCD Display Update Failure Configuration Changed Analog Output Fixed Simulation Active Analog Output Saturated LCD screen MEMRY WARN [If display is not updating] [none] ANLOG FIXED [none] ANLOG SAT LOI screen MEMORY WARN [If display is not updating] [none] ANALOG FIXED [none] ANALOG SAT Problem A user written parameter does not match expected value. A user written parameter does not match expected value. The LCD Display is not receiving updates from the pressure sensor. A recent change has been made the device by a secondary HART master such as a handheld device. The analog output is fixed and does not represent the process measurement. This may be caused by other conditions in the device, or because the device has been set to loop test or multidrop mode. The device is in simulation mode and may not be reporting actual information. The analog output is saturated either high or low due to the pressure either above or below the range values. Recommended action 1. Confirm and correct all parameters listed in Device Information. 2. Perform a Device Reset. 3. Replace Electronics Board. 1. Confirm and correct all parameters listed in Device Information. 2. Perform a Device Reset. 3. Replace pressure sensor. 1. Check the connection between the LCD display and the circuit board. 2. Replace the LCD display. 3. Replace the electronics board. 1. Verify that the configuration change of the device was intended and expected. 2. Clear this alert by selecting Clear Configuration Changed Status. 3. Connect a HART® master such as AMS Device Manager or similar which will automatically clear it. 1. Take action on any other notifications from the device. 2. If the device is in loop test, and should no longer be, disable or momentarily remove power. 3. If the device is in multidrop mode and should not be, re-enable loop current by setting the polling address to 0. 1. Verify that simulation is no longer required. 2. Disable simulation mode in service tools. 3. Perform a device reset. 1. Check the pressure applied to ensure it is between the 4--20mA points. 2. Check the transmitter pressure connection to make sure it is not plugged or isolating diaphragms are not damaged. 3. Replace the pressure sensor. Troubleshooting 79 Troubleshooting July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 Disassembly procedures Do not remove the instrument cover in explosive atmospheres when the circuit is live. Removing from service Follow these steps: 1. Follow all plant safety rules and procedures. 2. Power down device. 3. Isolate and vent the process from the transmitter before removing the transmitter from service. 4. Remove all electrical leads and disconnect conduit. 5. Remove the transmitter from the process connection. a. The Rosemount 2051C Transmitter is attached to the process connection by four bolts and two cap screws. Remove the bolts and screws and separate the transmitter from the process connection. Leave the process connection in place and ready for re-installation. Reference "Installation procedures" on page 30 for coplanar flange. b. The Rosemount 2051T Transmitter is attached to the process by a single hex nut process connection. Loosen the hex nut to separate the transmitter from the process. Do not wrench on neck of transmitter. See warning in "In-line process connection" on page 38. 6. Do not scratch, puncture, or depress the isolating diaphragms. 7. Clean isolating diaphragms with a soft rag and a mild cleaning solution, and rinse with clear water. 8. For the Rosemount 2051C, whenever you remove the process flange or flange adapters, visually inspect the PTFE O-rings. Replace the O-rings if they show any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. Undamaged O-rings may be reused. Removing terminal block Electrical connections are located on the terminal block in the compartment labeled "FIELD TERMINALS." 1. Remove the housing cover from the field terminal side. 2. Loosen the two small screws located on the assembly in the 9 o'clock and 5 o'clock positions relative to the top of the transmitter. 3. Pull the entire terminal block out to remove it. Removing the electronics board The transmitter electronics board is located in the compartment opposite the terminal side. To remove the electronics board see Figure 4-2 on page 51 and perform following procedure: 1. Remove the housing cover opposite the field terminal side. 2. If you are disassembling a transmitter with a LOI/LCD display, loosen the two captive screws that are visible (See Figure 4-1 on page 50 for screw locations). The two screws anchor the LOI/LCD display to the electronics board and the electronics board to the housing. 80 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Troubleshooting July 2017 6.4.4 6.5 Note The electronics board is electrostatically sensitive; observe handling precautions for static-sensitive components 3. Using the two captive screws, slowly pull the electronics board out of the housing. The sensor module ribbon cable holds the electronics board to the housing. Disengage the ribbon cable by pushing the connector release. Note If an LOI/LCD display is installed, use caution as there is an electronic pin connector that interfaces between the LOI/LCD display and electronics board. Removing sensor module from the electronics housing 1. Remove the electronics board. Refer to "Removing the electronics board" on page 80. Note To prevent damage to the sensor module ribbon cable, disconnect it from the electronics board before you remove the sensor module from the electrical housing. 2. Carefully tuck the cable connector completely inside of the internal black cap. Note Do not remove the housing until after you tuck the cable connector completely inside of the internal black cap. The black cap protects the ribbon cable from damage that can occur when you rotate the housing. 3. Using a 5/64-inch hex wrench, loosen the housing rotation set screw one full turn. 4. Unscrew the module from the housing, making sure the black cap on the sensor module and sensor cable do not catch on the housing. Reassembly procedures 1. Inspect all cover and housing (non-process wetted) O-rings and replace if necessary. Lightly grease with silicone lubricant to ensure a good seal. 2. Carefully tuck the cable connector completely inside the internal black cap. To do so, turn the black cap and cable counterclockwise one rotation to tighten the cable. 3. Lower the electronics housing onto the module. Guide the internal black cap and cable on the sensor module through the housing and into the external black cap. 4. Turn the module clockwise into the housing. Troubleshooting 81 Troubleshooting July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 Note Make sure the sensor ribbon cable and internal black cap remain completely free of the housing as you rotate it. Damage can occur to the cable if the internal black cap and ribbon cable become hung up and rotate with the housing. 5. Thread the housing completely onto the sensor module. The housing must be no more than one full turn from flush with the sensor module to comply with explosion proof requirements. 6. Tighten the housing rotation set screw using a 5/64-in. hex wrench. Attaching electronics board 1. Remove the cable connector from its position inside of the internal black cap and attach it to the electronics board. 2. Using the two captive screws as handles, insert the electronics board into the housing. Make sure the power posts from the electronics housing properly engage the receptacles on the electronics board. Do not force. The electronics board should slide gently on the connections. 3. Tighten the captive mounting screws. 4. Replace the electronics housing cover. The transmitter covers must be engaged metal-to-metal to ensure a proper seal and to meet explosion-proof requirements. Installing terminal block 1. Gently slide the terminal block into place, making sure the two power posts from the electronics housing properly engage the receptacles on the terminal block. 2. Tighten the captive screws. 3. Replace the electronics housing cover. The transmitter covers must be fully engaged to meet explosion-proof requirements. Reassembling the Rosemount 2051C Process Flange 1. Inspect the sensor module PTFE O-rings. Undamaged O-rings may be reused. Replace O-rings that show any signs of damage, such as nicks, cuts, or general wear. Note If you are replacing the O-rings, be careful not to scratch the O-ring grooves or the surface of the isolating diaphragm when removing the damaged O-rings. 82 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Troubleshooting July 2017 2. Install the process connection. Possible options include: a. Coplanar process flange: -- Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to finger tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten as this will affect module-to-flange alignment. -- Install the four 1.75-in. flange bolts by finger tightening them to the flange. b. Coplanar process flange with flange adapters: -- Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to finger tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten as this will affect module-to-flange alignment. -- Hold the flange adapters and adapter O-rings in place while installing (in the desired of the four possible process connection spacing configurations) using four 2.88-in. bolts to mount securely to the coplanar flange. For gage pressure configurations, use two 2.88-in. bolts and two 1.75-in. bolts. c. Manifold: -- Contact the manifold manufacturer for the appropriate bolts and procedures. 3. Tighten the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-5 on page 83 for appropriate torque values. 4. Using same cross pattern, tighten bolts to final torque values seen in Table 6-5 on page 83. Table 6-5. Bolt Installation Torque Values Bolt material Initial torque value Final torque value Carbon steelASTM-A445 Standard 316 stainless steelOption L4 ASTM-A-19 B7Moption L5 ASTM-A-193 Class 2, Grade B8Moption L8 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 150 in-lb (17 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 150 in-lb (17 N-m) 650 in-lb (73 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 650 in-lb (73 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m) Note If you replaced the PTFE sensor module O-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow. 6.5.4 Note For range 1 transmitters: After replacing O-rings and re-installing the process flange, expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours. Then re-tighten the flange bolts in a cross pattern, and again expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours before calibration. Installing drain/vent valve 1. Apply sealing tape to the threads on the seat. Starting at the base of the valve with the threaded end pointing toward the installer, apply five clockwise turns of sealing tape. 2. Tighten the drain/vent valve seat to 250 in-lb (28,25 N-m). 3. Take care to place the opening on the valve so that process fluid will drain toward the ground and away from human contact when the valve is opened. Troubleshooting 83 Troubleshooting July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 84 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements July 2017 Section 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) Certification The safety-critical output of the RosemountTM 2051 is provided through a two-wire, 4--20 mA signal representing pressure. The Rosemount 2051 safety certified pressure transmitter is certified to: Low Demand; Type B. SIL 2 for random integrity @ HFT=0 SIL 3 for random integrity @ HFT=1 SIL 3 for systematic integrity Rosemount 2051 safety certified identification All Rosemount 2051 Transmitters must be identified as safety certified before installing into SIS systems. To identify a safety certified Rosemount 2051C, Rosemount 2051T, Rosemount 2051L: 1. Check NAMUR Software Revision located on the metal device tag. "SW _._._". NAMUR Software Revision Number SW(1) 1.0.x--1.4.x 1. NAMUR Software Revision: Located on the metal device tag 2. Transmitter output code "A" (4--20 mA HART Protocol). Installation in SIS applications Installations are to be performed by qualified personnel. No special installation is required in addition to the standard installation practices outlined in this document. Always ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing cover(s) so that metal contacts metal. Environmental and operational limits are available in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data. The loop should be designed so the terminal voltage does not drop below 10.5 Vdc when the transmitter output is set to 23 mA. Position the security switch to the ( ) position to prevent accidental or deliberate change of configuration data during normal operation. Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements 85 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 7.1.3 Configuring in SIS applications Use any HART® Protocol capable configuration tool to communicate with and verify configuration of the Rosemount 2051. Note Transmitter output is not safety-rated during the following: Configuration changes, multidrop, and loop test. Alternative means should be used to ensure process safety during transmitter configuration and maintenance activities. Damping User-selected damping will affect the transmitters ability to respond to changes in the applied process. The damping value + response time must not exceed the loop requirements. Reference "Damping" on page 17 to change damping value. Alarm and saturation levels DCS or safety logic solver should be configured to match transmitter configuration. Figure 7-1 identifies the three alarm levels available and their operation values. Figure 7-1. Alarm Levels Rosemount alarm level 3.75 mA(1) 3.9 mA Low saturation Normal operation 4 mA 20 mA NAMUR alarm level 20.8 mA High saturation 21.75(2) 3.6 mA(1) 3.8 mA Low saturation Normal operation 4 mA 20 mA Custom alarm level 20.5 mA High saturation 22.5(2) Normal operation 3.6 - 3.8 mA(1) 3.7--3.9 mA Low saturation 4 mA 20 mA 20.2--23.0(2) 20.1--22.9 mA High saturation 1. Transmitter failure, hardware or software alarm in LO position. 2. Transmitter failure, hardware or software alarm in HI position. 86 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements July 2017 7.1.4 Rosemount 2051 SIS operation and maintenance Proof test The following proof tests are recommended. In the event that an error is found in the safety and functionality, proof test results and corrective actions taken can be documented at Emerson.com/Rosemount/Safety. All proof test procedures must be carried out by qualified personnel. Use "Field Communicator Fast Keys" on page 184 to perform a loop test, analog output trim, or sensor trim. Security switch should be in the ( ) position during proof test execution and repositioned in the ( ) position after execution. Simple proof test The simple suggested proof test consists of a power cycle plus reasonability checks of the transmitter output. Reference the FMEDA Report for percent of possible DU failures in the device. Required tools: Field Communicator and mA meter. 1. Bypass the safety function and take appropriate action to avoid a false trip. 2. Use HART communications to retrieve any diagnostics and take appropriate action. 3. Send a HART command to the transmitter to go to the high alarm current output and verify that the analog current reaches that value(1). See "Verifying alarm level" on page 24. 4. Send a HART command to the transmitter to go to the low alarm current output and verify that the analog current reaches that value(1). 5. Remove the bypass and otherwise restore the normal operation. 6. Place the Security switch in the ( ) position. Comprehensive proof test The comprehensive proof test consists of performing the same steps as the simple suggested proof test but with a two point calibration of the pressure sensor in place of the reasonability check. Reference the FMEDA Report for percent of possible DU failures in the device. 1. This tests for possible quiescent current related failures. Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements 87 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Required tools: Field Communicator and pressure calibration equipment. 1. Bypass the safety function and take appropriate action to avoid a false trip. 2. Use HART communications to retrieve any diagnostics and take appropriate action. 3. Send a HART command to the transmitter to go to the high alarm current output and verify that the analog current reaches that value(1). See "Verifying alarm level" on page 24. 4. Send a HART command to the transmitter to go to the low alarm current output and verify that the analog current reaches that value (1). 5. Perform a two-point calibration of the sensor (see "Trim the pressure signal" on page 66) over the full working range and verify the current output at each point. 6. Remove the bypass and otherwise restore the normal operation. 7. Place the Security switch in the ( ) position. Note The user determines the proof test requirements for impulse piping. Automatic diagnostics are defined for the corrected % DU: The tests performed internally by the device during runtime without requiring enabling or programming by the user. 7.1.5 Calculation of average probability of failure on demand (PFDAVG) PFDAVG calculation can be found in the FMEDA Report. Inspection Visual inspection Not required Special tools Not required Product repair The Rosemount 2051 is repairable by major component replacement. All failures detected by the transmitter diagnostics or by the proof-test must be reported. Feedback can be submitted electronically at Emerson.com/Rosemount/Contact-Us. All product repair and part replacement should be performed by qualified personnel. Rosemount 2051 SIS reference The Rosemount 2051 must be operated in accordance to the functional and performance specifications provided in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data. 1. This tests for compliance voltage problems such as a low loop power supply voltage or increased wiring distance. This also tests for other possible failures. 88 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements July 2017 Failure rate data The FMEDA Report includes failure rates and common cause Beta factor estimates. Failure values Safety accuracy: ±2.0% Transmitter response time: 1.5 seconds Self-diagnostics test: At least once every 60 minutes Product life 50 years - based on worst case component wear-out mechanisms - not based on wear-out of process wetted materials Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements 89 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 90 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Appendix A Specifications and Reference Data Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 91 Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 95 Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 99 Dimensional drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 102 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 113 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 142 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 145 A.1 Performance specifications A.1.1 Conformance to specification (±3 [Sigma]) Technology leadership, advanced manufacturing techniques and statistical process control ensure specification conformance to at least ±3. A.1.2 Reference accuracy RosemountTM models Standard 2051C Range 1 ±0.10% of span For spans less than 15:1, accuracy = 0.025 + 0.005 S--U--p--R-a---L-n-- % of span Ranges 2--4 ±0.065% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy = 0.025 + 0.005 S--U--p--R-a---L-n-- % of span Range 5 ±0.075% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy= 0.025 + 0.005 S--U--p--R-a---L-n-- % of span High performance option, P8(1) N/A N/A Ranges 2--4 Range 5 High accuracy option, P8 ±0.05% of span For spans less than 10:1(2), accuracy = 0.015 + 0.005 S--U--p--R-a---L-n-- % of span High performance option, P8 ±0.065% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy= 0.015 + 0.005 S--U--p--R-a---L-n-- % of span 91 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA RosemountTM models Standard 2051T Ranges 1--4 ±0.065% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy = 0.0075 S--U--p--R-a---L-n-- % of span Range 5 ±0.075% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy = 0.0075 S--U--p--R-a---L-n-- % of span 2051L Ranges 2--4 ±0.075% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy = 0.025 + 0.005 S--U--p--R-a---L-n-- % of span 1. Not available with output code W. 2. For protocol code F, accuracy specification is for spans less than 7:1. Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 High performance option, P8(1) Ranges 1--4 High accuracy option, P8 ±0.05% of span For spans less than 10:1(2), accuracy = 0.0075 S--U--p--R-a---L-n-- % of span N/A N/A N/A N/A Specifications and Reference Data 92 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A.1.3 Flow performance Flow reference accuracy Rosemount 2051CFA AnnubarTM Flow Meter Ranges 2--3 ±2.00% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown Rosemount 2051CFC_A Compact Annubar Flow Meter Rosemount Annubar option A Ranges 2--3 Standard Calibrated ±2.60% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±2.30% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Orifice Flow Meter conditioning option C Ranges 2--3 = 0.4 = 0.65 ±2.25% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±2.45% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Orifice Flow Meter orifice type option P(1) Ranges 2--3 =0.4 =0.65 ±2.50% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±2.50% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Bore < 0.1 Ranges 2--3 0.1 < Bore < 0.2 0.2 < Bore < 0.6 0.6 < Bore < 0.8 1. For smaller line sizes, see Rosemount Compact Orifice. ±3.10% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±2.75% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±2.25% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±3.00% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown Long-term stability ±50 °F (28 °C) temperature changes and up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure. Rosemount models Standard 2051C Range 1 (CD) Ranges 2--5 2051T Ranges 1--5 ±0.2% of URL for 1 year ±0.1% of URL for 3 years ±0.1% of URL for 3 years High performance option, P8 ±0.125% of URL for 5 years ±0.125% of URL for 5 years 93 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 A.1.4 Dynamic performance 4--20 mA HART®(1) 1--5 Vdc HART low power FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA Protocols(2) Total response time (Td + Tc)(3): 2051C, Range 3--5: Range 1: Range 2: 2051T: 2051L: 115 ms 270 ms 130 ms 100 ms See Instrument ToolkitTM 152 ms 307 ms 152 ms 152 ms See Instrument Toolkit Dead time (Td) 60 ms (nominal) 97 ms Update rate 22 times per second 22 times per second 1. Dead time and update rate apply to all models and ranges; analog output only. 2. Transducer block response time, analog Input block execution time not included. 3. Nominal total response time at 75 °F (24 °C) reference conditions. Typical HART transmitter response time Transmitter Output vs. Time Pressure released 100% Td Tc Td= Dead time Tc = Time constant Response time = Td + Tc 36.8% 0% 63.2% of total step change Time Line pressure effect per 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) Ambient temperature effect per 50 °F (28 °C) For line pressures above 2000 psi (13,7 MPa) and Ranges 4--5, see Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual for HART, Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual for WirelessHART®, Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual for FOUNDATION Fieldbus, and Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual PROFIBUS® PA. Rosemount models Line pressure effect 2051CD, 2051CF Zero error(1) Range 1 ±0.25% of URL/ 1000 psi (68,9 bar) Ranges 2--3 ±0.05% of URL/ 1000 psi (68,9 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 13,7 MPa) 1. Can be calibrated out at line pressure. Span error ±0.4% of reading/ 1,000 psi (68,9 bar) ±0.1% of reading/ 1,000 psi (68,9 bar) Rosemount models Ambient temperature effect 2051C, 2051CF Ranges 2--5 ±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 5:1 ±(0.05% URL + 0.25% span) from 5:1 to 100:1 Range 1 ±(0.1% URL + 0.25% span) from 1:1 to 30:1 2051T Range 2--4 ±(0.05% URL + 0.25% span) from 1:1 to 30:1 ±(0.07% URL + 0.25% span) from 30:1 to 100:1 Range 1 ±(0.05% URL + 0.25% span) from 1:1 to 10:1 ±(0.10% URL + 0.25% span) from 10:1 to 100:1 Range 5 2051L ±(0.1% URL + 0.15% span) See Instrument Toolkit Specifications and Reference Data 94 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Mounting position effects Rosemount models Mounting position effects 2051C 2051T 2051L Zero shifts up to ±1.25 inH2O (3,1 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect. Zero shifts up to ±2.5 inH2O (6,2 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect. With liquid level diaphragm in vertical plane, zero shift of up to 1 inH2O (2,49 mbar). With diaphragm in horizontal plane, zero shift of up to 5 inH2O (12,43 mbar) plus extension length on extended units. Zero shifts can be calibrated out. No span effect. Vibration effect Less than ±0.1% of URL when tested per the requirements of IEC60770-1: 1999 field or pipeline with high vibration level (10--60 Hz 0.21 mm displacement peak amplitude/60--2000 Hz 3g). Power supply effect Less than ±0.005% of calibrated span per volt.(1) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Meets all relevant requirements of EN 61326 and NAMUR NE-21.(2) Maximum deviation < 1% Span during EMC disturbance.(3) 1. Does not apply to wireless (output code X). 2. NAMUR NE-21 does not apply to wireless output code X. 3. During surge event device may exceed maximum EMC deviation limit or reset; however, device will self-recover and return to normal operation within specified start-up time. Transient protection (option code T1) Meets IEEE C62.41, category location B 6 kV crest (0.5 s--100 kHz) 3 kA crest (8 x 20 microseconds) 6 kV crest (1.2 x 50 microseconds) A.2 Functional specifications A.2.1 Range and sensor limits Table A-1. Range and Sensor Limits for Rosemount 2051CD, 2051CF, 2051CG, 2051L Models Range Minimum span Upper (URL) Rosemount 2051C Differential and 2051CF Flow Meters Lower (LRL) Rosemount 2051C Gage(1) Rosemount 2051L Differential 1 0.5 inH2O (1,2 mbar) 25 inH2O (62,3 mbar) 2 2.5 inH2O (6,2 mbar) 250 inH2O (0,62 bar) 3 10 inH2O (24,9 mbar) 1000 inH2O (2,49 bar) 4 3 psi (0,207 bar) 300 psi (20,7 bar) 5 20 psi (1,38 bar) 2000 psi (137,9 bar) 1. Assumes atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psig. --25 inH2O (--62,1 mbar) --250 inH2O (--0,62 bar) --1000 inH2O (--2,49 bar) --300 psi (--20,7 bar) --2000 psi (--137,9 bar) --25 inH2O (--62,1 mbar) --250 inH2O (--0,62 bar) --393 inH2O (--979 mbar) --14.2 psig (--979 mbar) --14.2 psig (--979 mbar) N/A --250 inH2O (--0,62 bar) --1000 inH2O (--2,49 bar) --300 psi (--20,7 bar) N/A Rosemount 2051L Gage(1) N/A --250 inH2O (--0,62 bar) --393 inH2O (--979 mbar) --14.2 psig (--979 mbar) N/A 95 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Range Table A-2. Range and Sensor Limits for Rosemount 2051T Model Minimum span Upper (URL) Lower (LRL)(Abs) 1 0.3 psi (20,7 mbar) 30 psi (2,07 bar) 2 1.5 psi (0,103 bar) 150 psi (10,3 bar) 3 8 psi (0,55 bar) 800 psi (55,2 bar) 4 40 psi (2,76 bar) 4000 psi (275,8 bar) 5 2,000 psi (137,9 bar) 10,000 psi (689,5 bar) 1. Assumes atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psig. 0 psia (0 bar) 0 psia (0 bar) 0 psia (0 bar) 0 psia (0 bar) 0 psia (0 bar) A.2.2 Service Output Lower(1) (LRL)(Gage) --14.7 psig (--1,01 bar) --14.7 psig (--1,01 bar) --14.7 psig (--1,01 bar) --14.7 psig (--1,01 bar) --14.7 psig (--1,01 bar) Liquid, gas, and vapor application A.2.3 4--20 mA (output code A) Power supply External power supply required. Standard transmitter operates on 10.5--42.4 Vdc with no load. Load limitations Maximum loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply, as described by: Max. Loop Resistance = 43.5 (Power Supply Voltage 10.5) 1387 Load (s) 1000 500 Operating Region 0 10.5 20 30 Voltage (Vdc) 42.4(1) Communication requires a minimumloop resistance of 250 ohms. 1. For CSA approval, power supply must not exceed 42.4 V. Indication Two-wire 4--20 mA, user selectable for linear or square root output. Digital process variable superimposed on 4--20 mA signal, available to any host that conforms to HART Protocol. Rosemount 2051 Digital communications based on HART Revision 5 Protocol. Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART The 2051 with Selectable HART comes with Selectable HART Revisions. Digital communications based on HART Revision 5 (default) or Revision 7 (option code HR7) Protocol can be selected. The HART revision can be switched in the field using any HART based configuration tool or the optional local operator interface (LOI). LOI The LOI utilizes a two-button menu with internal and external configuration buttons. Internal buttons are always configured for LOI. External buttons can be configured for either LOI, (option code M4), analog zero and span (option code D4) or digital zero trim (option code DZ). See Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART Reference Manual for LOI configuration menu. Optional two line LOI/LCD display. Zero and span adjustment requirements Zero and span values can be set anywhere within the range limits stated in Table A-1 and Table A-2. Span must be greater than or equal to the minimum span stated in Table A-1 and Table A-2. Specifications and Reference Data 96 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A.2.4 HART 1--5 Vdc low power (output code M) Output Three wire 1--5 Vdc output, user-selectable for linear or square root output. Digital process variable superimposed on voltage signal, available to any host conforming to the HART Protocol. Rosemount 2051 Digital communications based on HART Revision 5 protocol. Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART comes with Selectable HART Revisions. Digital communications based on HART Revision 5 (default) or Revision 7 (option code HR7) protocol can be selected. The HART Revision can be switched in the field using any HART based configuration tool or the optional LOI. LOI The LOI utilizes a two button menu with internal and external configuration buttons. Internal buttons are always configured for LOI. External buttons can be configured for either LOI, (option code M4), analog zero and span (option code D4) or digital zero trim (option code DZ). Power supply External power supply required. standard transmitter operates on 9 to 28 Vdc with no load. Power consumption 3.0 mA, 27--84 mW Output load 100 k or greater (meter input impedance) Turn-on time Performance within specifications less than 2.0 seconds after power is applied to the transmitter. A.2.5 Overpressure limits Transmitters withstand the following limits without damage: Rosemount 2051C, 2051CF Ranges 2--5: 3,626 psig (250 bar) 4,500 psig (310,3 bar) for option code P9 Range 1: 2,000 psig (137,9 bar) Rosemount 2051T Range 1: 750 psi (51,7 bar) Range 2: 1,500 psi (103,4 bar) Range 3: 1,600 psi (110,3 bar) Range 4: 6,000 psi (413,7 bar) Range 5: 15,000 psi (1034,2 bar) Rosemount 2051L Limit is flange rating or sensor rating, whichever is lower. See table below: Table A-3. Rosemount 2051L Flange Rating Standard Type Carbon steel Stainless rating steel rating ANSI/ASME Class 150 285 psig 275 psig ANSI/ASME Class 300 740 psig 720 psig At 100 °F (38 °C), the rating decreases with increasing temperature, per ANSI/ASME B16.5. DIN PN 10--40 40 bar 40 bar DIN PN 10/16 16 bar 16 bar At 248 °F (120 °C), the rating decreases with increasing temperature, per DIN 2401. A.2.6 Static pressure limit Rosemount 2051CD, 2051CF Operates within specifications between static line pressures of --14.2 psig (0,034 bar) and 3626 psig (250 bar) For Option Code P9, 4500 psig (310,3 bar) Range 1: 0.5 psia to 2000 psig (34 mbar and 137,9 bar) 97 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 A.2.7 Burst pressure limits A.2.9 Process Rosemount 2051C, 2051CF Coplanar or Traditional Process Flange 10,000 psig (689.5 bar) Rosemount 2051T In-line Ranges 1--4: 11000 psi (758,4 bar) Range 5: 26000 psi (1792,6 bar) A.2.8 Failure mode alarm If self-diagnostics detect a sensor or microprocessor failure, the analog signal is driven either high or low to alert the user. High or low failure mode is user-selectable with a jumper on the transmitter. The values to which the transmitter drives its output in failure mode depend on whether it is factory-configured to standard or NAMUR-compliant operation. The values for each are as follows: At atmospheric pressures and above. See table below: Table A-4. Process Temperature Limits Rosemount 2051C, 2051CF Silicone fill sensor(1) with coplanar flange with traditional flange with level flange with Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Inert fill sensor(1) --40 to 250 °F (--40 to 121 °C)(2) --40 to 300 °F (--40 to 149 °C)(2)(3) --40 to 300 °F (--40 to 149 °C)(2) --40 to 300 °F (--40 to 149 °C)(2) --40 to 185 °F (--40 to 85 °C)(3) Rosemount 2051T (process fill fluid) Silicone fill sensor(1) Inert fill sensor(1) --40 to 250 °F (--40 to 121 °C)(2) --22 to 250 °F (--30 to 121 °C)(2) Rosemount 2051L low side temperature limits Silicone fill sensor(1) Inert fill Sensor(1) --40 to 250 °F (--40 to 121 °C)(2) --40 to 185 °F (--40 to 85 °C) (2) High alarm Low alarm Default 21.75 mA 3.75 mA NAMUR compliant(1) 22.5 mA 3.6 mA Custom levels(2) 20.2--23.0 mA 3.6--3.8 mA 1. Analog output levels are compliant with NAMUR recommendation NE 43, see option codes C4 or C5. 2. Low alarm must be 0.1 mA less than low saturation and high alarm must be 0.1 mA greater than high saturation. Temperature limits Rosemount 2051L high side temperature limits (process fill fluid) SYLTHERM XLT Silicone 704 Silicone 200 Inert Glycerin and water Neobee M-20 --102 to 293 °F (--75 to 145°C) 32 to 401 °F (0 to 205 °C) --49 to 401 °F (--45 to 205 °C) --49 to 320 °F (--45 to 160 °C) 5 to 203 °F (--15 to 95 °C) 5 to 401 °F (--15 to 205 °C) Ambient --40 to 185 °F (--40 to 85 °C) Propylene glycol and water 5 to 203 °F (--15 to 95 °C) 1. Process temperatures above 185 °F (85 °C) require derating the ambient limits by a 1.5:1 ratio. with LCD display(1)(2): --40 to 175 °F (--40 to 80 °C) 2. 220 °F (104 °C) limit in vacuum service; 130 °F (54 °C) for pressures below 0.5 psia. Storage(1) 3. 160 °F (71 °C) limit in vacuum service. --50 to 230 °F (--46 to 110 °C) A.2.10 Humidity limits with LCD display: --40 to 185 °F (--40 to 85 °C) with Wireless output: --40 °F to 185 °F (--40 °C to 85 °C) 0--100 percent relative humidity 1. Rosemount 2051 LCD display may not be readable and LCD display updates may be slower at temperatures below --22 °F (--30 °C). A.2.11 Volumetric displacement 2. Wireless LCD display may not be readable and LCD display updates will be slower at temperatures below --4 °F (--20 °C). Less than 0.005 in3 (0,08 cm3) Specifications and Reference Data 98 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A.2.12 Damping 4--20 mA HART Protocol Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART Analog output response to a step input change is user-enterable from 0 to 60 seconds for one time constant. This software damping is in addition to sensor module response time. Rosemount 2051 Analog output response to a step input change is user-selectable from 0.4 to 60 seconds for one time constant. This software damping is in addition to sensor module response time. A.3 Physical specifications A.3.1 Material selection Emerson provides a variety of Rosemount product with various product options and configurations including materials of construction that can be expected to perform well in a wide range of applications. The Rosemount product information presented is intended as a guide for the purchaser to make an appropriate selection for the application. It is the purchaser's sole responsibility to make a careful analysis of all process parameters (such as all chemical components, temperature, pressure, flow rate, abrasives, contaminants, etc.), when specifying product, materials, options and components for the particular application. Emerson is not in a position to evaluate or guarantee the compatibility of the process fluid or other process parameters with the product, options, configuration or materials of construction selected. A.3.2 Electrical connections 1/2--14 NPT, G1/2, and M20 x 1.5 conduit A.3.3 Process connections Rosemount 2051C 1/4--18 NPT on 21/8-in. centers 1/2--14 NPT and RC 1/2 on 2-in.(50,8 mm), 21/8-in. (54,0 mm), or 21/4-in. (57,2 mm) centers (process adapters) Rosemount 2051T 1/2--14 NPT female G1/2 A DIN 16288 male (available in stainless steel for range 1--4 transmitters only) Autoclave type F-250-C (pressure relieved 9/16--18 gland thread; 1/4 O.D. high pressure tube 60° cone; available in stainless steel for Range 5 transmitters only) Rosemount 2051L High pressure side: 2-in.(50,8 mm), 3-in. (72 mm), or 4-in. (102 mm), ASME B 16.5 (ANSI) Class 150 or 300 flange; 50, 80, or 100 mm, DIN 2501 PN 40 or 10/16 flange Low pressure side: 1/4--18 NPT on flange, 1/2--14 NPT on process adapter Rosemount 2051CF For Rosemount 2051CFA wetted parts, see Rosemount DP Flow Meters and Primary Elements Product Data Sheet in the 485 section For Rosemount 2051CFC wetted parts, see Rosemount DP Flow Meters and Primary Elements Product Data Sheet in the 405 section For Rosemount 2051CFP wetted parts, see Rosemount DP Flow Meters and Primary Elements Product Data Sheet in the 1195 section A.3.4 Rosemount 2051C process wetted parts Drain/vent valves 316 stainless steel, alloy C-276, or alloy 400 material (alloy 400 not available with Rosemount 2051L) Process flanges and adapters Plated carbon steel, stainless steel cast CF-8M (cast version of 316 stainless steel, material per ASTM-A743), C-Type cast alloy CW12MW, or cast alloy M30C Wetted O-rings Glass-filled PTFE or graphite-filled PTFE 99 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Process isolating diaphragms Isolating diaphragm material Rosemount model 2051CD and 2051 CG 2051T 2051CA 315L stainless steel ? Alloy C-276 ? Alloy 400 ? Tantalum ? Gold-plated alloy 400 ? Gold-plated stainless steel ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? A.3.5 Rosemount 2051L Process wetted parts Flanged process connection (transmitter high side) Process diaphragms, including process gasket surface 316L stainless steel, alloy C-276, or tantalum Extension CF-3M (Cast version of 316L stainless steel, material per ASTM-A743), or Cast C-276. Fits schedule 40 and 80 pipe. Mounting flange Zinc-cobalt plated carbon steel or stainless steel Reference process connection (transmitter low side) Isolating diaphragms 316L stainless steel or alloy C-276 Reference flange and adapter CF-8M (cast version of 316 stainless steel, material per ASTM-A743) A.3.6 Non-wetted parts Electronics housing Low-copper aluminum or CF-8M (cast version of 316 stainless steel). Enclosure type 4X, IP 65, IP 66, IP68 Coplanar sensor module housing CF-3M (Cast version of 316L stainless steel, material per ASTM-A743) Bolts ASTM A449, Type 1 (zinc-cobalt plated carbon steel) ASTM F593G, Condition CW1 (Austenitic 316 stainless steel) ASTM A193, Grade B7M (zinc plated alloy steel) Alloy K-500 Sensor module fill fluid Silicone or inert halocarbon In-line series uses FluorinertTM FC-43 Process fill fluid (2051L only) SYLTHERMTM XLT, Silicone 704, Silicone 200, inert, glycerin and water, Neobee® M-20, or propylene glycol and water Paint Polyurethane Cover O-rings Buna-N A.3.7 Shipping weights Table A-5. Transmitter Weights without Options Rosemount transmitter Add weight in-lb. (kg) 2051C 2051L 2051T 4.9 (2.2) See Table A-6 3.1 (1.4) Table A-6. Rosemount 2051L Weights without Options Flange Flush 2-in. Ext. 4-in. Ext. 6-in. Ext. lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg) 2-in., 150 3-in., 150 4-in., 150 2-in., 300 12.5 (5,7) 17.5 (7,9) 23.5 (10,7) 17.5 (7,9) N/A N/A N/A 19.5 (8,8) 20.5 (9,3) 21.5 (9,7) 26.5 (12,0) 28.5 (12,9) 30.5 (13,8) N/A N/A N/A Specifications and Reference Data 100 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-6. Rosemount 2051L Weights without Options Flange Flush 2-in. Ext. 4-in. Ext. 6-in. Ext. lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg) 3-in., 300 4-in., 300 DN 50/ PN 40 DN 80/ PN 40 DN 100/ PN 10/16 DN 100/ PN 40 22.5 (10,2) 32.5 (14,7) 13.8 (6,2) 19.5 (8,8) 17.8 (8,1) 23.2 (10,5) 24.5 (11,1) 35.5 (16,1) 25.5 (11,6) 37.5 (17,0) 26.5 (12,0) 39.5 (17,9) N/A N/A N/A 21.5 (9,7) 22.5 (10,2) 23.5 (10,6) 19.8 (9,0) 20.8 (9,5) 21.8 (9,9) 25.2 (11,5) 26.2 (11,9) 27.2 (12,3) Table A-7. Transmitter Options Weights Code Option J, K, L, M M5 M5 B4 B1, B2, B3 B7, B8, B9 BA, BC H2 H3 H4 H7 FC FD FA FB FP FQ WSM Stainless steel housing LCD display for aluminum housing LCD display for wireless output Stainless steel mounting bracket for coplanar flange Mounting bracket for traditional flange Mounting bracket for traditional flange Stainless steel bracket for traditional flange Traditional flange Traditional flange Traditional flange Traditional Flange Level flange3-in., Class 150 Level flange3-in., Class 300 Level flange2-in., Class 150 Level flange2-in., Class 300 DIN Level flange, stainless steel, DN 50, PN 40 DIN Level flange, stainless steel, DN 80, PN 40 Stainless steel sensor module Power module (701PGNKF) Add lb (kg) 3.9 (1,8) 0.5 (0,2) 0.1 (0,04) 1.0 (0,5) 2.3 (1,0) 2.3 (1,0) 2.3 (1,0) 2.6 (1,2) 3.0 (1,4) 3.0 (1,4) 2.7 (1,2) 12.7 (5,8) 15.9 (7,2) 8.0 (3,6) 8.4 (3,3) 7.8 (3,5) 12.7 (5,8) 1.0 (0,45) 0.4 (0,18) 101 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A.4 Dimensional drawings Figure A-1. Rosemount2051C Exploded View EF D C B A Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 G H I P O J K N L M A. Cover I. Sensor module B. Cover O-ring J. Process O-ring C. Terminal block K. Flange adapter O-ring D. Electronics housing L. Flange alignment screw (not pressure retaining) E. Local configuration buttons M. Flange bolts F. Nameplate N. Flange adapters G. Electronic board O. Drain/vent valve H. Housing rotation set screw (180 max. housing rotation without further disassembly) P. Coplanar flange Specifications and Reference Data 102 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Figure A-2. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Flange 3.85 (98) 5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111) 7.04 (179) C B D A Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A. Transmitter circuitry B. HART display cover 6.53 (166) C. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover D. Terminal connection Figure A-3. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar with Rosemount 305 3-Valve Coplanar Integral Manifold 3.85 (98) 5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111) 6.19 (157) D 7.44 (189) A A BC 5.00 (127) max open A. Terminal connections B. Transmitter circuity 9.20 (234) max open C. HART display cover D. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover 103 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Figure A-4. Coplanar Flange Mounting Configurations with Optional Bracket (B4) for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting Pipe mounting Panel mounting 2.82 4.36 (72) (111) 2.18 (55) 7.03 (178) 6.25 (159) 6.15 (156) 2.81 (71) 4.73 (120) C 2.8 (71) A 3.51 (89) A. 2-in. U-bolt for pipe mounting B. 3/8-16 x 11/4 bolts for mounting to transmitter C. 5/16 x 11/2 bolts for panel mounting (not supplied) B 3.4 (85) Specifications and Reference Data 104 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Figure A-5. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar with Traditional Flange 3.85 (98) 5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111) Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA D 7.76 (197) C E A F B 1.10 (28) 3.40 (86) A. 1/2--14 NPT flange adapter (optional) B. Drain/vent valve C. Terminal connection 1.626 (41,3) 1.16 (29) 2.13 (54) D. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover E. HART display cover F. Transmitter circuitry Figure A-6. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar with Rosemount 304 3-Valve Traditional Integral Manifold 3.85 (98) 5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111) D 6.19 (157) A E C F B 3.75 (95) max open 1.626 (41,3) 1.05 3.50 (27) (89) A. 1/2--4 NPT flange adapter (optional) B. Drain/vent valve C. Terminal connections 1.10 (28) 2.126 6.20 (158) (54) max open 8.90 (226) max open D. Fieldbus display cover E. HART display cover F. Transmitter circuitry 2.70 (69) max open 105 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Figure A-7. Traditional Flange Mounting Configurations with Optional Brackets for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting Panel mount (bracket option B2/B8) Pipe mount (bracket option B3/B9/BC) 9.18 (233) 2.62 (67) 6.19 (157) 1.94 (49) 11.51 (292) 5.32 (135) 6.19 (157) 3.50 (89) 3.56 (90) max open 4. 85 (123) 1.10 (28) Pipe mount (bracket option B1/B7/BA) 6.76 (172) 3.56 (90) max open 1.10 (28) 3.50 (89) 2.62 (67) 0.93 (24) Specifications and Reference Data 106 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Figure A-8. Rosemount 2051T 3.85 (98) A 7.19 (182,7) B C 5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111) D A. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover B. HART display cover C. Transmitter circuitry D. Terminal connections Figure A-9. Rosemount 2051T with Rosemount 306 2-Valve Integral Manifold 3.85 (98) 5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111) A 7.19 (182,7) B D C 4.85 (123) 6.25 (159) max open A. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover B. HART display cover C. Transmitter D. Terminal connection 4.40 (112) Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 107 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Figure A-10. Rosemount 2051CFA Pak-Lok Annubar Flow Meter(1) Front view Side view D Top view B C A 1. The Rosemount Pak-Lok Annubar is available up to Class 600 ANSI (1,440 psig at 100 °F [99 bar at 38 °C]). Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Pak-Lok Annubar Flow Meter Dimensional Data Sensor size A (max) B (max) C (max) 1 8.50 (215,9) 14.55 (369,6) 9.00 (228,6) 2 11.00 (279,4) 16.30 (414,0) 9.00 (228,6) 3 12.00 (304,8) 19.05 (483,9) 9.00 (228,6) Dimensions are in inches (millimeters) D (max) 6.00 (152,4) 6.00 (152,4) 6.00 (152,4) Specifications and Reference Data 108 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Figure A-11. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Orifice Flow Meter Orifice plate side view Orifice plate front view Orifice plate top view D B C Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A Compact orifice plate (primary element type code P) 1.125 (28,58) D B C A Conditioning orifice plate (primary element type code C) 1.125 (28,58) Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Dimensions Primary element type A B Transmitter height C Type P and C 5.62 (143) Transmitter height + A 6.27 (159) 7.75 (197) - closed 8.25 (210) - open Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). D 6.00 (152) - closed 6.25 (159) - open 109 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure A-12. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Side view Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 8.8 (223,46) Bottom view B.D. 5.3 (134,51) Front view 10.2 (258,28) 6.2 (156,51) K Downstream J Upstream Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Dimensions Dimension 1/2-in. (15 mm) J (beveled/threaded pipe ends) J (RF slip-on, RTJ slip-on, RF-DIN slip on) J (RF Class 150, weld neck) J (RF Class 300, weld neck) J (RF Class 600, weld neck) K (beveled/threaded pipe ends) K (RF slip-on, RTJ slip-on, RF-DIN slip on)(1) K (RF Class 150, weld neck) K (RF Class 300, weld neck) K (RF Class 600, weld neck) B.D. (bore diameter) 12.54 (318,4) 12.62 (320,4) 14.37 (364,9) 14.56 (369,8) 14.81 (376,0) 5.74 (145,7) 5.82 (147,8) 7.57 (192,3) 7.76 (197,1) 8.01 (203.4) 0.664 (16,87) 1. Downstream length shown here includes plate thickness of 0.162-in. (411 mm). Line size 1-in. (25 mm) 20.24 (514,0) 20.32 (516,0) 22.37 (568,1) 22.63 (574,7) 22.88 (581,0) 8.75 (222,2) 8.83 (224,2) 10.88 (276,3) 11.14 (282,9) 11.39 (289,2) 1.097 (27,86) 11/2-in. (40 mm) 28.44 (722,4) 28.52 (724,4) 30.82 (782,9) 31.06 (789,0) 31.38 (797,1) 11.91 (302,6) 11.99 (304,6) 14.29 (363,1) 14.53 (369,2) 14.85 (377,2) 1.567 (39,80) Specifications and Reference Data 110 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Figure A-13. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level 2-in. Flange Configuration (flush mount only) 3.85 (98) ED I A H Optional flushing connection ring (lower housing) G F E K I. 2-in., 4-in., or 6-in. extension J. Terminal connections K. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover L. HART display cover M. Transmitter circuitry Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA 3- and 4-in. Flange Configuration 3.85 (98) 5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111) J KL 6.60 (68) 7.02 (178) 8.12 (206) M A H Diaphragm assembly and mounting flange B C 111 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-11. Rosemount 2051L Dimensional Specifications Class ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150 ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300 ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 600 DIN 2501 PN 10--40 DIN 2501 PN 25/40 DIN 2501 PN 10/16 Pipe size 2 (51) 3 (76) 4 (102) 2 (51) 3 (76) 4 (102) 2 (51) 3 (76) DN 50 DN 80 DN 100 DN 100 Flange thickness A Bolt circle diameter B Outside No. of diameter C bolts Bolt hole diameter Extension diameter D(1) O.D. gasket surface E 0.69 (18) 0.88 (22) 0.88 (22) 0.82 (21) 1.06 (27) 1.19 (30) 1.00 (25) 1.25 (32) 20 mm 24 mm 24 mm 20 mm 4.75 (121) 6.0 (152) 7.5 (191) 5.0 (127) 6.62 (168) 7.88 (200) 5.0 (127) 6.62 (168) 125 mm 160 mm 190 mm 180 mm 6.0 (152) 7.5 (191) 9.0 (229) 6.5 (165) 8.25 (210) 10.0 (254) 6.5 (165) 8.25 (210) 165 mm 200 mm 235 mm 220 mm 4 0.75 (19) 4 0.75 (19) 8 0.75 (19) 8 0.75 (19) 8 0.88 (22) 8 0.88 (22) 8 0.75 (19) 8 0.88 (22) 4 18 mm 8 18 mm 8 22 mm 8 18 mm NA 2.58 (66) 3.5 (89) NA 2.58 (66) 3.5 (89) NA 2.58 (66) NA 66 mm 89 mm 89 mm 3.6 (92) 5.0 (127) 6.2 (158) 3.6 (92) 5.0 (127) 6.2 (158) 3.6 (92) 5.0 (127) 4.0 (102) 5.4 (138) 6.2 (158) 6.2 (158) Class(1) Pipe size 2 (51) ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150 3 (76) 4 (102) 2 (51) ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300 3 (76) 4 (102) ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 600 2 (51) 3 (76) DIN 2501 PN 10--40 DN 50 DIN 2501 PN 25/40 DN 80 DN 100 DIN 2501 PN 10/16 DN 100 1. Tolerances are 0.040 (1,02), --0.020 (0,51). Process side F 2.12 (54) 3.6 (91) 3.6 (91) 2.12 (54) 3.6 (91) 3.6 (91) 2.12 (54) 3.6 (91) 2.4 (61) 3.6 (91) 3.6 (91) 3.6 (91) Lower housing G 1/4 NPT 1/2 NPT 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) H 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 7.65 (194) 7.65 (194) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) Specifications and Reference Data 112 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A.5 Ordering information A.5.1 Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 2051C configurations: Configuration Transmitter output code 4--20 mA HART® Protocol ·Rosemount 2051 A ·Enhanced Rosemount 2051(1) FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol F PROFIBUS PA Protocol W 1. The enhanced 4--20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7. See Performance specifications and options for more details on each configuration. Additional Information Specifications: page 91 Certifications: page 149 Dimensional drawings: page 102 Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Rosemount model Transmitter type 2051C Coplanar pressure transmitter Measurement type D Differential G Gage Pressure range 2051CD 2051CG 1 --25 to 25 inH2O (--62,2 to 62,2 mbar) --25 to 25 inH2O (--62,2 to 62,2 mbar) 2 --250 to 250 inH2O (--623 to 623 mbar) --250 to 250 inH2O (--623 to 623 mbar) 3 --1000 to 1000 inH2O (--2,5 to 2,5 bar) --393 to 1000 inH2O (--0,98 to 2,5 bar) 4 --300 to 300 psi (--20,7 to 20,7 bar) --14.2 to 300 psi (--0,98 to 20,7 bar) 5 --2000 to 2000 psi (--137,9 to 137,9 bar) --14.2 to 2000 psi (--0,98 to 137,9 bar) Transmitter output A(1) 4--20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol F FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol W PROFIBUS PA Protocol M Low-Power, 1--5 Vdc with digital signal based on HART Protocol 113 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Materials of construction Process flange type Flange material Drain/vent 2 Coplanar Stainless steel Stainless steel 3(2) Coplanar Cast C-276 Alloy C-276 5 Coplanar Plated CS Stainless steel 7(2) Coplanar Stainless steel Alloy C-276 8(2) Coplanar Plated CS Alloy C-276 0 Alternate process connection Isolating diaphragm 2(2) 316L stainless steel 3(2) Alloy C-276 5(3) Tantalum O-ring A Glass-filled PTFE B Graphite-filled PTFE Sensor fill fluid 1 Silicone 2 Inert Housing material Conduit entry size A Aluminum B Aluminum J Stainless steel K(4) Stainless steel D Aluminum M(4) Stainless steel 1/2--14 NPT M20 x 1.5 1/2--14 NPT M20 x 1.5 G1/2 G1/2 Options (Include with selected model number) PlantWeb control functionality A01 FOUNDATION Fieldbus advanced control function block suite Specifications and Reference Data 114 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Alternate flange(5) H2 Traditional flange, 316 stainless steel, stainless steel drain/vent H3(2) Traditional flange, cast C-276, alloy C-276 drain/vent H7(2) Traditional flange, 316 stainless steel, alloy C-276 drain/vent HJ DIN compliant traditional flange, stainless steel, 7/16-in. adapter/manifold bolting FA Level flange, stainless steel, 2-in., ANSI Class 150, vertical mount FB Level flange, stainless steel, 2-in., ANSI Class 300, vertical mount FC Level flange, stainless steel, 3-in., ANSI Class 150, vertical mount FD Level flange, stainless steel, 3-in., ANSI Class 300, vertical mount FP DIN level flange, stainless steel, DN 50, PN 40, vertical mount FQ DIN level flange, stainless steel, DN 80, PN 40, vertical mount HK(6) DIN compliant traditional flange, stainless steel, 10 mm adapter/manifold bolting HL DIN compliant traditional flange, stainless steel, 12 mm adapter/manifold bolting Manifold assembly(6)(7) S5 Assemble to Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold S6 Assemble to Rosemount 304 Manifold or Connection System Integral mount primary element(6)(7) S4(8) Assemble to Rosemount Annubar Flow Meter or Rosemount 1195 Integral Orifice S3 Assemble to Rosemount 405 Primary Element Seal assemblies(7) S1(9) Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 Diaphragm Seal S2(10) Assemble to two Rosemount 1199 Diaphragm Seals Mounting brackets B1 Traditional flange bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting, carbon steel bolts B2 Traditional flange bracket for panel mounting, carbon steel bolts B3 Traditional flange flat bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting, carbon steel bolts B4 Coplanar flange bracket for 2-in. pipe or panel mounting, all stainless steel B7 B1 bracket with series 300 stainless steel bolts B8 B2 bracket with series 300 stainless steel bolts B9 B3 bracket with series 300 stainless steel bolts BA Stainless steel B1 bracket with series 300 stainless steel bolts BC Stainless steel B3 bracket with series 300 stainless steel bolts 115 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Product Certifications E1(4) ATEX Flameproof E2(4) INMETRO Flameproof E3(4) China Flameproof E4(4) TIIS Flameproof E5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof E6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2 E7(4) IECEx Flameproof EW India (CCOE) Flameproof Approval I1(4) ATEX Intrinsic Safety I2(4) INMETRO Intrinsically Safe I3(4) China Intrinsic Safety I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 I6 CSA Intrinsically Safe I7(4) IECEx Intrinsic Safety IA(11) ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety IE(12) FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe IF(12) CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe IG(12) IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe IW(4) India (CCOE) Intrinsically Safe K1(4) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust K2 INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety K5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 K6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 K7(4) IECEx Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n and Dust KA(4) ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KB FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KC(4) FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KD(4) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe N1(4) ATEX Type n N7(4) IECEx Type n ND(4) ATEX Dust Drinking Water Approval(13) DW NSF Drinking Water Approval Specifications and Reference Data 116 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Shipboard approvals SBS American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval SBV Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval SDN Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval SLL Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval Bolting materials L4 Austenitic 316 stainless steel bolts L5 ASTM A 193, grade B7M bolts L6 Alloy K-500 bolts L8 ASTM A 193 Class 2, grade B8M bolts Display and interface options M4(12) LCD display with LOI M5 LCD display Hardware adjustments(14) D4 Zero and span configuration buttons DZ Digital zero trim Flange adapters(15) DF 1/2--14 NPT flange adapters Conduit plug(16) DO 316 stainless steel conduit plug RC1/4 RC1/2 process connection(17) D9 RC 1/4 flange with RC 1/2 flange adapter -- stainless steel Ground screw(18) V5 External ground screw assembly Performance(19) P8 High performance option Transient protection(20) T1 Transient protection terminal block Software configuration(21) C1 Custom software configuration (completed Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet required with order) 117 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Alarm limit(14) C4(22) CN(22) CR CS CT NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels) Pressure testing P1 Hydrostatic testing with certificate Cleaning process area P2 Cleaning for special service P3 Cleaning for < 1 PPM chlorine/flourine Maximum static line pressure P9 4500 psig (310 bar) static pressure limit (Rosemount 2051CD ranges 2--5 only) Calibration Certification Q4 Calibration Certificate QG Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate QP Calibration certification and tamper evident seal Material Traceability Certification Q8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B Quality Certification for Safety(21) QS Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data QT Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA Surface finish Q16 Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals Toolkit total system performance reports QZ Remote seal system performance calculation report Conduit electrical connection GE M12, 4-pin, male connector (eurorast®) GM A size mini, 4-pin, male connector (minifast®) Specifications and Reference Data 118 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. HART Revision Configuration(14) HR5(23) Configured for HART Revision 5 HR7(24) Configured for HART Revision 7 Typical Model Number: 2051C D 2 A 2 2 A 1 A B4 M5 1. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7. 2. Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. 3. Available in ranges 2--5 only. 4. Not available with low power output code M. 5. Requires 0 code in materials of construction for alternate process connection. 6. Not valid with optional code P9 for 4500 psi static pressure. 7. "Assemble-to" items are specified separately and require a completed model number. 8. Process flange limited to coplanar (codes 2, 3, 5, 7, 8) or traditional (H2, H3, H7). 9. Not valid with optional code D9 for RC1/2 adaptors. 10. Not valid with optional codes DF and D9 for adaptors. 11. Only valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 12. Not available with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 13. Not available with alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all cast C-276 flanges, all plated carbon steel flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code). 14. Only available with HART 4--20 mA (output codes A and M). 15. Not valid with alternate process connection options S3, S4, S5, S6. 16. Transmitter is shipped with 316 stainless steel conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug. 17. Not available with alternate process connection: DIN flanges and level flanges. 18. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 19. Available with 4--20 mA HART output code A, FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F, Rosemount 2051C ranges 2--5 or 2051T ranges 1--4, stainless steel diaphragms and silicone fill fluid. High performance option includes 0.05 percent reference accuracy, five year stability and improved ambient temperature effect specifications. See "Performance specifications" on page 91 for details. 20. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE. 21. Only available with HART 4--20 mA (output code A). 22. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field. 23. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 24. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 119 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 A.5.2 Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Additional Information This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 2051T configurations: Configuration Transmitter output code 4--20 mA HART Protocol ·Rosemount 2051 A ·Enhanced Rosemount 2051(1) FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus Protocol F PROFIBUS PA Protocol W 1. The enhanced 4--20 mA HART device can be ordered with transmitter output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7. See Performance specifications and Options for more details on each configuration. Specifications: page 91 Certifications: page 149 Dimensional drawings: page 102 Table A-13. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Rosemount model Transmitter type 2051T In-line pressure transmitter Pressure type G Gage A Absolute Pressure range Rosemount 2051TG Rosemount 2051TA 1 --14.7 to 30 psi (--1,0 to 2.1 bar) 0 to 30 psi (0 to 2.1 bar) 2 --14.7 to 150 psi (--1,0 to 10.3 bar) 0 to 150 psi (0 to 10.3 bar) 3 --14.7 to 800 psi (--1,0 to 55 bar) 0 to 800 psi (0 to 55 bar) 4 --14.7 to 4000 psi (--1,0 to 276 bar) 0 to 4000 psi (0 to 276 bar) 5 --14.7 to 10000 psi (--1.0 to 689 bar) 0 to 10000 psi (0 to 689 bar) Transmitter output A(1) 4--20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol F FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol W PROFIBUS PA Protocol M Low-power, 1--5 Vdc with digital signal based on HART Protocol Process connection style 2B 1/2--14 NPT female 2C G1/2 A DIN 16288 male (available in stainless steel for range 1-4 only) 2F Coned and threaded, compatible with autoclave type F-250-C (range 5 only) Specifications and Reference Data 120 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-13. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Isolating diaphragm(2) Process connection wetted parts material 2 316L stainless steel 316L stainless steel 3 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Sensor fill fluid 1 Silicone 2 Inert Housing material Conduit entry size A Aluminum 1/2--14 NPT B Aluminum M20 x 1.5 J Stainless steel 1/2--14 NPT K(3) Stainless steel M20 x 1.5 D Aluminum G1/2 M(3) Stainless steel G1/2 Options (Include with selected model number) PlantWeb control functionality A01 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite Manifold assemblies(4) S5 Assemble to Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Seal assemblies(4) S1 Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 Diaphragm Seal Mounting bracket B4 Bracket for 2-in. pipe or panel mounting, all stainless steel Product Certifications E1(3) ATEX Flameproof E2(3) INMETRO Flameproof E3(3) China Flameproof E4(3) TIIS Flameproof E5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof E6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2 E7(3) IECEx Flameproof EW(3) India (CCOE) Flameproof Approval I1(3) ATEX Intrinsic Safety I2(3) INMETRO Intrinsically Safe I3(3) China Intrinsic Safety I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 I6 CSA Intrinsically Safe I7(3) IECEx Intrinsic Safety IA(6) ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety IE(6) FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe IF(6) CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe 121 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-13. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. IG(6) IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe IW(3) India (CCOE) Intrinsic Safety Approval K1(3) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust K5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 K6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 K7(3) IECEx Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n and Dust KA(3) ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KB FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KC(3) FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KD(3) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe N1(3) ATEX Type n N7(3) IECEx Type n ND(3) ATEX Dust Drinking Water Approval(5) DW NSF Drinking Water Approval Shipboard Approvals SBS American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval SBV Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval SDN Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval SLL Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval Display and interface options M4(6) LCD display with LOI M5 LCD display Hardware adjustments(7) D4 Zero and span configuration buttons DZ Digital zero trim Conduit plug DO(8) 316 stainless steel conduit plug Ground screw(9) V5 External ground screw assembly Performance(10) P8 High performance option Terminal blocks(11) T1 Transient protection terminal block Software configuration(12) C1 Custom software configuration (completed Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet required with order) Alarm limits(7) C4(13) CN(13) CR CS CT Analog output levels compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, alarm high Analog output levels compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, alarm low Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels) Pressure testing Specifications and Reference Data 122 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-13. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. P1 Hydrostatic testing with certificate Cleaning process area(14) P2 Cleaning for special service P3 Cleaning for <1 PPM chlorine/fluorine Calibration certification Q4 Calibration Certificate QG Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate QP Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal Material traceability certification Q8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B Quality certification for safety(12) QS Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data QT Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA Surface finish Q16 Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals Toolkit total system performance reports QZ Remote seal system performance calculation report Conduit electrical connector GE M12, 4-pin, male connector (eurofast) GM A size Mini, 4-pin, male connector (minifast) HART revision configuration(7) HR5(15) Configured for HART Revision 5 HR7(16) Configured for HART Revision 7 Typical model number: 2051T G 3 A 2B 2 1 A B4 M5 1. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7. 2. Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. 3. Not available with low power output code M. 4. "Assemble-to" items are specified separately and require a completed model number. 5. Not available with coned and threaded connection (2F code), assemble-to manifold (S5 code), assemble-to seal (S1 code), surface finish certification (Q16 code), remote seal system report (QZ code). 6. Not available with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 7. Only Available with HART 4--20 mA (output codes A and M). 8. Transmitter is shipped with 316 stainless steel conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug. 9. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 10. Available with 4--20 mA HART output code A, FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F, Rosemount 2051C ranges 2--5 or 2051T ranges 1--4, stainless steel diaphragms and silicone fill fluid. High performance option includes 0.05 percent reference accuracy, five year stability and improved ambient temperature effect specifications. See "Performance specifications" on page 91 for details. 11. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE. 12. Only available with HART 4--20 mA output code A. 13. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field. 14. Not valid with Alternate Process Connection S5. 15. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 16. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 123 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 A.5.3 Rosemount 2051CF Flow Meter Series This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 2051CF configurations: Configuration Transmitter output code 4--20 mA HART Protocol ·Rosemount 2051 A ·Enhanced Rosemount 2051(1) FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus Protocol F PROFIBUS PA Protocol W 1. The enhanced 4--20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7. See Performance specifications and options for more details on each configuration. Rosemount 2051CFA Compact Flow Meter Table A-14. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Rosemount model Product description 2051CFA Rosemount Annubar Flow Meter Measurement type D Differential Pressure Fluid type L Liquid G Gas S Steam Line size 020 2-in. (50 mm) 025 21/2-in. (63,5 mm) 030 3-in. (80 mm) 035 31/2-in. (89 mm) 040 4-in. (100 mm) 050 5-in. (125 mm) 060 6-in. (150 mm) 070 7-in. (175 mm) 080 8-in. (200 mm) 100 10-in. (250 mm) 120 12-in. (300 mm) Pipe I.D. range C Range C from the pipe I.D. table D Range D from the pipe I.D. table A Range A from the pipe I.D. table B Range B from the pipe I.D. table E Range E from the pipe I.D. table Z Non-standard pipe I.D. range or line sizes greater than 12-in. Specifications and Reference Data 124 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-14. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Pipe material/mounting assembly material C Carbon steel (A105) S 316 stainless steel 0(1) No mounting (customer supplied) G Chrome-moly grade F-11 N Chrome-moly grade F-22 J Chrome-moly grade F-91 Piping orientation H Horizontal piping D Vertical piping with downwards flow U Vertical piping with upwards flow Rosemount Annubar type P Pak-lok F Flanged with opposite side support Sensor material S 316 stainless steel Sensor size 1 Sensor size 1 line sizes 2- to 8-in. (50 to 200 mm) 2 Sensor size 2 line sizes 6- to 96-in. (150 to 2400 mm) 3 Sensor size 3 line sizes greater than 12-in. (300 mm) Mounting type T1 Compression or threaded connection A1 Class 150 RF ANSI A3 Class 300 RF ANSI A6 Class 600 RF ANSI D1 DN PN16 flange D3 DN PN40 flange D6 DN PN100 flange R1 Class 150 RTJ flange R3 Class 300 RTJ flange R6 Class 600 RTJ flange Opposite side support or packing gland 0 No opposite side support or packing gland (required for pak-lok and flange-lok models) Opposite side support -- required for flanged models C NPT threaded opposite support assembly -- extended tip D Welded opposite support assembly -- extended tip Isolation valve for flo-tap models 0(1) Not applicable or customer supplied Temperature measurement T Integral RTD -- not available with flanged model greater than Class 600 0 No temperature sensor R Remote thermowell and RTD Transmitter connection platform 3 Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve manifold-- not available with flanged model greater than Class 600 5 Direct -mount, 5-valve manifold -- not available with flanged model greater than Class 600 7 Remote-mount NPT connections (1/2-in. FNPT) 8 Remote-mount SW connections (1/2-in.) 125 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-14. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Differential pressure range 1 0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) 2 0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) 3 0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) Transmitter output A(2) 4--20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol F FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol W PROFIBUS PA Protocol M Low-power, 1--5 Vdc with digital signal based on HART Protocol Transmitter housing material Conduit entry size A Aluminum B Aluminum J Stainless steel K(3) Stainless steel D Aluminum M(3) Stainless steel 1/2--14 NPT M20 x 1,5 1/2--14 NPT M20 x 1,5 G1/2 G1/2 Transmitter performance class 1 2.0 percent flow rate accuracy, 5:1 flow turndown, 2-year stability Options (Include with selected model number) Pressure testing(4) P1 Hydrostatic testing with certificate PX Extended hydrostatic testing Special cleaning P2 Cleaning for special services PA Cleaning per ASTM G93 level D (section 11.4) Material testing V1 Dye penetrant exam Material examination V2 Radiographic examination Special inspection QC1 Visual and dimensional inspection with certificate QC7 Inspection and performance certificate Surface finish RL Surface finish for low pipe Reynolds number in gas and steam RH Surface finish for high pipe Reynolds number in liquid Material Traceability Certification Q8(5) Material Traceability Certification per EN 10474:2004 3.1 Code conformance J2 ANSI/ASME B31.1 J3 ANSI/ASME B31.3 Materials conformance(6) J5 NACE MR-0175/ISO 15156 Specifications and Reference Data 126 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-14. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Country Certification J6 European Pressure Directive (PED) J1 Canadian Registration Instrument connections for remote mount options G2 Needle valves, stainless steel G6 OS&Y gate valve, stainless steel G1 Needle valves, carbon steel G3 Needle valves, alloy C-276 G5 OS&Y gate valve, carbon steel G7 OS&Y gate valve, alloy C-276 Special shipment Y1 Mounting hardware shipped separately Product certifications E1(3) E2 E3(3) E4(3) E5 E6 E7 I1(3) I2 I3(3) I5(3) I6 I7(3) IA(7) IE(7) IF(7) IG(7) K1(3) K2(3) K5 K6 K7(3) KA(3) KB KC(3) KD(3) N1(3) N7(3) ND(3) ATEX Flameproof INMETRO Flameproof China Flameproof TIIS Flameproof FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2 IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ATEX Intrinsic Safety INMETRO Intrinsic Safety China Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 CSA Intrinsically Safe IECEx Intrinsic Safety ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol only FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5) CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n (combination of E7, I7, and N7) ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5, E6, I5, and I6) FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of E5, I5, E6, I6, E1, and I1) ATEX Type n IECEx Type n ATEX Dust Sensor fill fluid and O-ring options L1 Inert sensor fill fluid L2 Graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring LA Inert sensor fill fluid and graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring Display and interface options M4(8) LCD display with LOI M5 LCD display 127 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-14. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Transmitter Calibration Certification Q4 Calibration Certificate for Transmitter Quality Certification for Safety(9) QS Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data QT Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA Transient protection(10) T1 Transient terminal block Manifold for remote mount option F6 5-valve manifold, stainless steel F1 3-valve manifold, carbon steel F5 5-valve manifold, carbon steel PlantWeb control functionality A01(7) FOUNDATION Fieldbus advanced control function block suite Hardware adjustments(11) D4 Zero and span hardware adjustments DZ Digital zero trim Alarm limit(11) C4(12) CN(12) CR CS CT NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels) Ground screw(13) V5 External ground screw assembly HART revision configuration(11) HR5(14) Configured for HART Revision 5 HR7(15) Configured for HART Revision 7 Typical model number: 2051CFA D L 060 D C H P S 2 T1 0 0 0 3 2A A 1A 3 1. Provide the "A" dimension for flanged and pak-lok. 2. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7. 3. Not available with low power output code M. 4. Applies to assembled flow meter only, mounting not tested. 5. Instrument connections for remote mount options and isolation valves for flo-tap models are not included in the Material Traceability Certification. 6. Materials of construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. 7. Only valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 8. Not available with FOUNDATION Fieldbus (output code F). 9. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output code A). 10. Not available with housing code 00, 5A or 7J. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA. 11. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output codes A and M). 12. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field. 13. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 14. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 15. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. Specifications and Reference Data 128 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flow Meter Additional information Specifications: page 91 Certifications: page 149 Dimensional drawings: page 102 Table A-15. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Rosemount model Product description 2051CFC Compact flow meter Measurement type D Differential Pressure Primary Element technology C Conditioning orifice plate P Orifice plate Material type S 316 stainless steel Line size 005(1) 1/2-in. (15 mm) 010(1) 1-in. (25 mm) 015(1) 11/2-in. (40 mm) 020 2-in. (50 mm) 030 3-in. (80 mm) 040 4-in. (100 mm) 060 6-in. (150 mm) 080 8-in. (200 mm) 100 10-in. (250 mm) 120 12-in. (300 mm) Primary element style N Square edged Primary element type 040 0.40 beta ratio 065(2) 0.65 beta ratio Temperature measurement 0 No temperature sensor R Remote thermowell and RTD Transmitter connection platform 3 Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve manifold 7 Remote-mount, 1/4-in. NPT connections Differential pressure range 1 0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) 2 0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) 3 0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) 129 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-15. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Transmitter output A(3) 4--20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol F FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol W PROFIBUS PA Protocol M Low-power, 1--5 Vdc with digital signal based on HART Protocol Transmitter housing material Conduit entry size A Aluminum B Aluminum J Stainless steel K(4) Stainless steel D Aluminum M(4) Stainless steel 1/2--14 NPT M20 x 1,5 1/2-14 NPT M20 x 1,5 G1/2 G1/2 Transmitter performance Class 1 up to ±2.25% flow rate accuracy, 5:1 flow turndown, 2-year stability Options (Include with selected model number) Installation accessories AB ANSI alignment ring (Class 150) (only required for 10- and 12-in. (250 and 300 mm) line sizes) AC ANSI alignment ring (Class 300) (only required for 10- and 12-in. (250 and 300 mm) line sizes) AD ANSI alignment ring (Class 600) (only required for 10- and 12-in. (250 and 300 mm) line sizes) DG DIN alignment ring (PN16) DH DIN alignment ring (PN40) DJ DIN alignment ring (PN100) JB JIS alignment ring (10K) JR JIS alignment ring (20K) JS JIS alignment ring (40K) Remote adapters FE Flange adapters 316 stainless steel (1/2-in. NPT) High temperature application HT Flow (5) Graphite valve packing (Tmax = 850 °F) WC Flow calibration certification (3 point) WD Discharge coefficient verification (full 10 point) Pressure testing P1 Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate Special cleaning P2 Cleaning for special services PA Cleaning per ASTM G93 level D (section 11.4) Special inspection QC1 Visual and Dimensional Inspection with Certificate QC7 Inspection and Performance Certificate Transmitter Calibration Certification Q4 Calibration Certificate for Transmitter Quality Certification for Safety(6) QS Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data QT Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA Specifications and Reference Data 130 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-15. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Material Traceability Certification Q8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1 Code conformance J2 ANSI/ASME B31.1 J3 ANSI/ASME B31.3 J4 ANSI/ASME B31.8 Materials conformance(7) J5 NACE MR-0175/ISO 15156 Country Certification J1 Canadian Registration Product Certifications E1(3) E2 E3(3) E4(3) E5 E6 E7 I1(3) I2 I3(4) I5(4) I6 I7(4) IA(8) IE(7) IF(7) IG(7) K1(4) K2(4) K5 K6 K7(4) KA(4) KB KC(4) KD(4) N1(4) N7(4) ND(4) ATEX Flameproof INMETRO Flameproof China Flameproof TIIS Flameproof FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2 IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ATEX Intrinsic Safety INMETRO Intrinsic Safety China Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 CSA Intrinsically Safe IECEx Intrinsic Safety ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol only FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5) CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n (combination of E7, I7, and N7) ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5, E6, I5, and I6) FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of E5, I5, E6, I6, E1, and I1) ATEX Type n IECEx Type n ATEX Dust Sensor fill fluid and O-ring options L1 Inert sensor fill fluid L2 Graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring LA Inert sensor fill fluid and graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring Display and interface options M4(6) LCD display with LOI M5 LCD display Transient protection T1(9) 131 Transient terminal block Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-15. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Manifold for remote mount option F2 3-valve manifold, stainless steel F6 5-valve manifold, stainless steel Alarm limit(10) C4(11) CN(11) CR CS CT NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels) PlantWeb control functionality(8) A01 FOUNDATION Fieldbus advanced control function block suite Hardware adjustments(10) D4 Zero and span hardware adjustments DZ Digital zero trim Ground screw(12) V5 External ground screw assembly HART Revision configuration(10) HR5(13) Configured for HART Revision 5 HR7(14) Configured for HART Revision 7 Typical Model Number: 2051CFC D C S 060 N 065 0 3 2 A A 1 WC E5 M5 1. Not available for Primary Element technology C. 2. For 2-in. (50 mm) line sizes the Primary Element type is 0.6 for Primary Element technology code C. 3. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7. 4. Not available with low power output code M. 5. Not available with Primary Element technology P. 6. Only available wit 4--20 mA HART (output code A). 7. Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. 8. Only valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 9. Not available with Housing code 00, 5A or 7J. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA. 10. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output codes A and M). 11. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field. 12. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 13. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 14. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 if 14 needed. Specifications and Reference Data 132 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Additional information Specifications: page 91 Certifications: page 149 Dimensional drawings: page 102 Table A-16. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Rosemount model Product description 2051CFP Integral orifice flow meter Measurement type D Differential Pressure Material type S 316 stainless steel Line size 005 1/2-in. (15 mm) 010 1-in. (25 mm) 015 11/2-in. (40 mm) Process connection T1 NPT female body (not available with remote thermowell and RTD) S1(1) Socket weld body (not available with remote thermowell and RTD) P1 Pipe ends: NPT threaded P2 Pipe ends: beveled D1 Pipe ends: flanged, DIN PN16, slip-on D2 Pipe ends: flanged, DIN PN40, slip-on D3 Pipe ends: flanged, DIN PN100, slip-on W1 Pipe ends: flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, weld-neck W3 Pipe ends: flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, weld-neck W6 Pipe ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, weld-neck A1 Pipe ends: flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, slip-on A3 Pipe ends: flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, slip-on A6 Pipe ends: flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, slip-on R1 Pipe ends: flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 150, slip-on R3 Pipe ends: flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 300, slip-on R6 Pipe ends: flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 600, slip-on Orifice plate material S 316 stainless steel Bore size option 0066 0.066-in. (1,68 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe 0109 0.109-in. (2,77 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe 0160 0.160-in. (4,06 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe 0196 0.196-in. (4,98 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe 0260 0.260-in. (6,60 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe 0340 0.340-in. (8,64 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe 0150 0.150-in. (3,81 mm) for 1-in. pipe 0250 0.250-in. (6,35 mm) for 1-in. pipe 0345 0.345-in. (8,76 mm) for 1-in. pipe 133 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-16. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. 0500 0.500-in. (12,70 mm) for 1-in. pipe 0630 0.630-in. (16,00 mm) for 1-in. pipe 0800 0.800-in. (20,32 mm) for 1-in. pipe 0295 0.295-in. (7,49 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe 0376 0.376-in. (9,55 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe 0512 0.512-in. (13,00 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe 0748 0.748-in. (19,00 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe 1022 1.022-in. (25,96 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe 1184 1.184-in. (30,07 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe 0010 0.010-in. (0,25 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe 0014 0.014-in. (0,36 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe 0020 0.020-in. (0,51 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe 0034 0.034-in. (0,86 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe Transmitter connection platform D3 Direct-mount, 3-valve manifold, stainless steel D5 Direct-mount, 5-valve manifold, stainless steel R3 Remote-mount, 3-valve manifold, stainless steel R5 Remote-mount, 5-valve manifold, stainless steel Differential pressure ranges 1 0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) 2 0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) 3 0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) Transmitter output A(2) 4--20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol F FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol W PROFIBUS PA Protocol M Low-power, 1--5 Vdc with digital signal based on HART Protocol Transmitter housing material Conduit entry size A Aluminum B Aluminum J Stainless steel K(3) Stainless steel D Aluminum M(3) Stainless steel 1/2--14 NPT M20 x 1,5 1/2--14 NPT M20 x 1,5 G1/2 G1/2 Transmitter performance Class 1 up to ±2.25% flow rate accuracy, 5:1 flow turndown, 2-year stability Options (Include with selected model number) Temperature sensor(4) RT Thermowell and RTD Optional connection G1 DIN 19213 transmitter connection Pressure testing(5) P1 Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate Special cleaning P2 Cleaning for special services PA Cleaning per ASTM G93 level D (section 11.4) Specifications and Reference Data 134 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-16. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Material testing V1 Dye penetrant exam Material examination V2 Radiographic examination Flow calibration(6) WD Discharge coefficient verification Special inspection QC1 Visual and Dimensional Inspection with Certificate QC7 Inspection and Performance Certificate Material Traceability Certification Q8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1 Code conformance(7) J2 ANSI/ASME B31.1 J3 ANSI/ASME B31.3 J4 ANSI/ASME B31.8 Materials conformance(8) J5 NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156 Country Certification J6 European Pressure Directive (PED) J1 Canadian Registration Transmitter Calibration Certification Q4 Calibration Certificate for Transmitter Quality Certification for Safety(9) QS Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data QT Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA Product Certifications E1(3) ATEX Flameproof E2 INMETRO Flameproof E3(3) China Flameproof E4(3) TIIS Flameproof E5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof E6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2 E7 IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof I1(3) ATEX Intrinsic Safety I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety I3(3) China Intrinsic Safety I5(3) FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 I6 CSA Intrinsically Safe I7(3) IECEx Intrinsic Safety IA(10) ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol only IE(7) FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe IF(7) CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe IG(7) IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe K1(3) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust K2(3) INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety K5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5) 135 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-16. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. K6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6) K7(3) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n (combination of E7, I7, and N7) KA(3) ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KB FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5, E6, I5, and I6) KC(3) FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KD(3) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of E5, I5, E6, I6, E1, and I1) N1(3) ATEX Type n N7(3) IECEx Type n ND(3) ATEX Dust Sensor fill fluid and O-ring options L1 Inert sensor fill fluid L2 Graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring LA Inert sensor fill fluid and graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring Display and interface options M4(9) LCD display with LOI M5 LCD display Transient protection(11) T1 Transient terminal block Alarm limit(12)(13) C4(14) CN(14) CR CS CT NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels) PlantWeb control functionality(10) A01 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite Hardware adjustments(12) D4 Zero and span hardware adjustments DZ Digital zero trim Ground screw(15) V5 External ground screw assembly HART revision configuration(12) HR5(16) Configured for HART Revision 5 HR7(17) Configured for HART Revision 7 Typical Model Number: 2051CFP D S 010 W1 S 0500 D3 2 A A 1 E5 M5 1. To improve pipe perpendicularity for gasket sealing, socket diameter is smaller than standard pipe O.D. 2. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7. 3. Not available with low power Output Code M. 4. Thermowell material is the same as the body material. 5. Does not apply to process connection codes T1 and S1. 6. Not available for bore sizes 0010, 0014, 0020, or 0034. 7. Not available with DIN Process Connection codes D1, D2, or D3. 8. Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. 9. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (Output Code A). 10. Only valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus Output Code F. 11. Not available with Housing code 00, 5A or 7J. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA. 12. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output codes A and M). 13. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output codes A and M). 14. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field. 15. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 16. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 17. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. Specifications and Reference Data 136 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A.5.4 Rosemount 2051L Level Transmitter Additional information This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 2051L configurations: Configuration Transmitter output code 4--20 mA HART Protocol ·Rosemount 2051 A ·Enhanced Rosemount 2051(1) FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol F PROFIBUS PA Protocol W 1. The enhanced 4--20 mA HART device can be ordered with transmitter output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7. See Performance specifications and Options for more details on each configuration. Specifications: page 91 Certifications: page 149 Dimensional Drawings: page 102 Table A-17. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Rosemount model Transmitter type 2051L Liquid level transmitter Pressure range 2 --250 to 250 inH2O (--0,6 to 0,6 bar) 3 --1000 to 1000 inH2O (--2,5 to 2,5 bar) 4 --300 to 300 psi (--20,7 to 20,7 bar) Transmitter output A(1) 4--20 mA with digital signal Based on HART Protocol F FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol W PROFIBUS PA Protocol M Low-power, 1--5 V dc with digital signal based on HART Protocol Process connection size, diaphragm material (high side) Process connection size Diaphragm G(2) 2-in./DN 50 H(2) 2-in./DN 50 J 2-in./DN 50 A(2) 3-in./DN 80 B(2) 4-in./DN 100 C(2) 3-in./DN 80 D(2) 4-in./DN 100 E 3-in./DN 80 F 4-in./DN 100 316L stainless steel Alloy C-276 Tantalum 316L stainless steel 316L stainless steel Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Tantalum Tantalum 137 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-17. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Extension length (high side) 0 None, flush mount 2 2-in./50 mm 4 4-in./100 mm 6 6-in./150 mm Mounting flange size, rating, material (high side) Size Rating Material M 2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 Carbon steel A 3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 Carbon steel B 4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 Carbon steel N 2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 Carbon steel C 3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 Carbon steel D 4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 Carbon steel X(2) 2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 Stainless steel F(2) 3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 Stainless steel G(2) 4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 Stainless steel Y(2) Displayed ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 Stainless steel H(2) 3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 Stainless steel J(2) 4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 Stainless steel Q DN50 PN 10--40 per EN 1092-1 Carbon steel R DN80 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 Carbon steel K(2) DN50 PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1 Stainless steel T(2) DN80 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 Stainless steel Seal fill fluid (high side) Specific gravity Temperature limits (ambient temperature of 70 °F [21 °C]) A Syltherm XLT C Silicone 704 D Silicone 200 H Inert (halocarbon) G Glycerin and water N Neobee M-20 P Propylene glycol and water 0.85 --102 to 293 °F (--75 to 145 °C) 1.07 32 to 401 °F (0 to 205 °C) 0.93 --49 to 401 °F (--45 to 205 °C) 1.85 5 to 401 °F (--15 to 205 °C) 1.13 --49 to 320 °F (--45 to 160 °C) 0.92 5 to 401 °F (--15 to 205 °C) 1.02 5 to 203 °F (--15 to 95 °C) Sensor module configuration, flange adapter (low side)(2) Configuration Flange adapter 1 Gage Stainless steel 2 Differential Stainless steel 3(3) Tuned-system with remote seal None Sensor module diaphragm material, sensor fill fluid (low side)(2) Diaphragm material Sensor fill fluid 1 316L stainless steel Silicone 2 Alloy C-276 (stainless steel valve seat) Silicone 7 Alloy C-276 (alloy C-276 valve seat) Silicone Specifications and Reference Data 138 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-17. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. A 316L stainless steel Inert (halocarbon) B Alloy C-276 (stainless steel valve seat) Inert (halocarbon) G Alloy C-276 (Alloy C-276 valve seat) Inert (halocarbon) O-ring A Glass-filled PTFE Housing material Conduit entry size A Aluminum B Aluminum J Stainless steel K(4) Stainless steel D Aluminum M(4) Stainless steel 1/2--14 NPT M20 x 1,5 1/2--14 NPT M20 x 1,5 G1/2 G1/2 Options (Include with selected model number) PlantWeb control functionality(5) A01 FOUNDATION Fieldbus advanced control function block suite Seal assemblies(6) S1 Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 Seal (requires Rosemount 1199M) Product Certifications E1(4) ATEX Flameproof E2(4) INMETRO Flameproof E3(4) China Flameproof E4(4) TIIS Flameproof E5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof E6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2 E7(4) IECEx Flameproof EW India (CCOE) Flameproof Approval I1(4) ATEX Intrinsic Safety I2(4) INMETRO Intrinsically Safe I3(4) China Intrinsic Safety I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 I6 CSA Intrinsically Safe I7(4) IECEx Intrinsic Safety IA(5) ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety IE(5) FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe IF(5) CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe IG(5) IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe IW India (CCOE) Intrinsically Safety Approval K1(4) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust K2 INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety K5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 K6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 K7(4) IECEx Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n and Dust 139 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-17. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. KA(4) ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KB FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KC(4) FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 KD(4) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe N1(4) ATEX Type n N7(4) IECEx Type n ND(4) ATEX Dust Shipboard Approvals SBS American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval SBV Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval SDN Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval SLL Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval Display and interface options M4(7) LCD display with LOI M5 LCD display Hardware adjustments(8) D4 Zero and span configuration buttons DZ Digital zero trim Flange adapters(9) DF 1/2--14 NPT flange adapters Conduit plug(10) DO 316 stainless steel conduit plug Ground screw(11) V5 External ground screw assembly Transient protection(12) T1 Transient terminal block Software configuration(13) C1 Custom software configuration (completed Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet required with order) Alarm limit C4(8)(14) CN(8)(14) CR(8) CS(8) CT(8) NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels) Calibration Certification Q4 Calibration Certificate QG Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate GP Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal Material Traceability Certification Q8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B Specifications and Reference Data 140 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Table A-17. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time. Quality Certification for Safety(13) QS Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data QT Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA Toolkit total system performance reports QZ Remote seal system performance calculation report Conduit electrical connector GE M12, 4-pin, male connector (eurofast) GM A size Mini, 4-pin, male connector (minifast) Lower housing flushing connection options Ring material Number Size (NPT) F1 F2 F3(15) F4(15) F7 F8 F9 F0 316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 1 1/4--18 NPT 2 1/4--18 NPT 1 1/4--18 NPT 2 1/4--18 NPT 1 1/2--14 NPT 2 1/2--14 NPT 1 1/2--14 NPT 2 1/2--14 NPT HART Revision configuration(8) HR5(16) Configured for HART Revision 5 HR7(17) Configured for HART Revision 7 Typical Model Number: 2051L 2 A A0 X D 21 A A B4 M5 F1 1. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7. 2. Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements highlighted within NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. 3. Requires option code S1. 4. Not available with low power output code M. 5. Only valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 6. "Assemble-to" items are specified separately and require a completed model number. 7. Not valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 8. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output codes A and M). 9. Not available with remote mount seal assembly option S1. 10. Transmitter is shipped with 316 stainless steel conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug. 11. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 12. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA, IE, IF, and IG. 13. Only available with HART 4--20 mA (output code A). 14. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory. 15. Not available with option codes A0, B0, and G0. 16. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 17. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 141 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 A.6 Options Standard configuration Unless otherwise specified, transmitter is shipped as follows: Engineering units differential/gage: Absolute/Rosemount 2051TA: inH2O (Range 0, 1, 2, and 3) psi (range 4 and 5) psi (all ranges) 4 mA: 0 (engineering units above) 20 mA: Upper range limit Output: Linear Flange type: Specified model code option Flange material: Specified model code option O-ring material: Specified model code option Drain/vent: Specified model code option LCD display: Installed or none Alarm: High Software tag: (Blank) Custom configuration If option code C1 is ordered, the customer may specify the following data in addition to the standard configuration parameters. Output Information Transmitter Information LCD display configuration Hardware selectable information Signal selection Refer to the Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet. Tagging (three options available) Standard stainless steel hardware tag is wired to the transmitter. Tag character height is 0.125-in. (3,18 mm), 56 characters maximum. Tag may be permanently stamped on transmitter nameplate upon request, 56 characters maximum. Tag may be stored in transmitter memory. Character limit is dependent on protocol. -- HART Revision 5: 8 characters -- HART Revision 7: 32 characters Optional Rosemount 304, 305, or 306 Integral Manifolds Factory assembled to Rosemount 2051C and Rosemount 2051T transmitters. Refer to the Rosemount Manifold Product Data Sheet for Rosemount 304, 305, and 306 for additional information. Other seals Refer to Rosemount DP Level Transmitters and1199 Diaphragm Seal System Product Data Sheet for additional information. Output information Output range points must be the same unit of measure. Available units of measure include: Pressure atm mbar bar inH20 inHg hPa mHg@0 °C inH2O@4 °C mmH2O mmHg mmH2O@4 °C ftH20 inH20@60 °F Psf g/cm2 kg/cm2 Pa kPa MPa kg/SqM ftH2O@4 °C psi torr cmH20@4 °C cmHG@0 °C ftH20@60 °F mH20@4 °C Display and interface options Both display options provide diagnostic messages for local troubleshooting and have 90-degree rotation capability for easy viewing. M4 Digital display with LOI(1) Commission the device with internal and external Local Configuration Buttons(1) M5 Digital display 2-Line, 5-Digit LCD for 4--20 mA HART Configuration buttons Enhanced Rosemount 2051 requires option D4 (analog zero and span), DZ (digital zero), or M4 (LOI) for local configuration buttons. Transient protection T1 Integral Transient Protection Terminal Block Meets IEEE C62.41, category location B 6 kV crest (0.5 ms--100 kHz) 3 kA crest (8 x 20 microseconds) 6 kV crest (1.2 x 50 microseconds) Specifications and Reference Data 1. LOI configuration buttons will be internal when either D4 or DZ option codes are ordered. 142 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Bolts for flanges and adapters Options permit bolts for flanges and adapters to be obtained in various materials Standard material is plated carbon steel per ASTM A449, Type 1 L4 Austenitic 316 stainless steel bolts L5 ASTM A 193, grade B7M bolts L6 Alloy K-500 bolts Conduit plug DO 316 stainless steel conduit plug Single 316 stainless steel conduit plug replaces carbon steel plug Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Flange and Rosemount 2051T bracket option B4 Bracket for 2-in. pipe or panel mounting For use with the standard coplanar flange configuration Bracket for mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe or panel Stainless steel construction with stainless steel bolts Rosemount 2051C Traditional Flange bracket options B1 Bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting For use with the traditional flange option Bracket for mounting on 2-in. pipe Carbon steel construction with carbon steel bolts Coated with polyurethane paint B2 Bracket for panel mounting For use with the traditional flange option Bracket for mounting transmitter on wall or panel Carbon steel construction with carbon steel bolts Coated with polyurethane paint B3 Flat bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting For use with the traditional flange option Bracket for vertical mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe Carbon steel construction with carbon steel bolts Coated with polyurethane paint B7 B1 bracket with stainless steel bolts Same bracket as the B1 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts B8 B2 bracket with stainless steel bolts Same bracket as the B2 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts B9 B3 bracket with stainless steel bolts Same bracket as the B3 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts BA Stainless steel B1 bracket with stainless steel bolts B1 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel bolts BC Stainless steel B3 bracket with stainless steel bolts B3 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel bolts Shipping weights Table A-18. Transmitter Weights without Options Transmitter Add weight In lb (kg) Rosemount 2051C Rosemount 2051L Rosemount 2051T 6.0 (2,7) Table A-19 3.0 (1,4) 143 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Table A-19. Rosemount 2051L Weights without Options Flange Flush 2-in. Ext. 4-in. Ext. 6-in. Ext. lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg) 2-in., 150 3-in., 150 4-in., 150 2-in., 300 3-in., 300 4-in., 300 2-in., 600 3-in., 600 DN 50/ PN 40 DN 80/ PN 40 DN 100/ PN 10/16 DN 100/ PN 40 12.5 (5,7) N/A N/A N/A 17.5 (7,9) 19.5 (8,8) 20.5 (9,3) 21.5 (9,7) 23.5 (10,7) 26.5 (12,0) 28.5 (12,9) 30.5 (13,8) 17.5 (7,9) N/A N/A N/A 22.5 (10,2) 24.5 (11,1) 25.5 (11,6) 26.5 (12,0) 32.5 (14,7) 35.5 (16,1) 37.5 (17,0) 39.5 (17,9) 15.3 (6,9) N/A N/A N/A 25.2 (11,4) 27.2 (12,3) 28.2 (12,8) 29.2 (13,2) 13.8 (6,2) N/A N/A N/A 19.5 (8,8) 21.5 (9,7) 22.5 (10,2) 23.5 (10,6) 17.8 (8,1) 19.8 (9,0) 20.8 (9,5) 21.8 (9,9) 23.2 (10,5) 25.2 (11,5) 26.2 (11,9) 27.2 (12,3) Table A-20. Transmitter Options Weights Code Option Add lb (kg) J, K, L, M Stainless steel housing (T) J, K, L, M Stainless steel housing (C, L, H, P) M5 LCD display for aluminum housing M6 LCD display for stainless steel housing B4 Stainless steel mounting bracket for coplanar flange B1, B2, B3 Mounting bracket for traditional flange B7, B8, B9 Mounting bracket for traditional flange BA, BC Stainless steel bracket for traditional flange H2 Traditional flange H3 Traditional flange H4 Traditional flange H7 Traditional flange FC Level flange3-in., 150 FD Level flange3-in., 300 FA Level flange2-in., 150 FB Level flange2-in., 300 FP DIN level flange, stainless steel, DN 50, PN 40 FQ DIN level flange, stainless steel, DN 80, PN 40 3.9 (1,8) 3.1 (1,4) 0.5 (0,2) 1.25 (0,6) 1.0 (0,5) 2.3 (1,0) 2.3 (1,0) 2.3 (1,0) 2.4 (1,1) 2.7 (1,2) 2.6 (1,2) 2.5 (1,1) 10.8 (4,9) 14.3 (6,5) 10.7 (4,8) 14.0 (6,3) 8.3 (3,8) 13.7 (6,2) Specifications and Reference Data 144 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA A.7 Spare parts Rosemount 2051 upgrade kits Part number The following come with electronics board and configuration buttons (if applicable). Aluminum/stainless steel 4--20 mA HART with no configuration buttons 02021-0020-2100 4--20 mA HART with digital zero trim 02021-0020-2110 4--20 mA HART with analog zero and span 02021-0020-2120 Rosemount 2051 LOI upgrade kit The following come with electronics board, LOI display, and LOI configuration buttons. Order display cover safety instrumented systems requirements. 4--20 mA HART with LOI 02021-0020-2139 Rosemount 2051 LOI/LCD display LCD display only. LCD display is only compatible with enhanced Rosemount 2051 electronics 4--20mA HART - aluminum 4--20 mA HART - 316 stainless steel 03031-0199-0012 03031-0199-0022 Terminal block, HART Protocol Part number 4--20 mA HART output Standard terminal block assembly 02051-9005-0001 Transient terminal block assembly (option T1) 02051-9005-0002 1--5 Vdc HART low power output Standard terminal block assembly 02051-9005-0011 Transient terminal block assembly (option T1) 02051-9005-0012 Electronics board, HART Protocol Part number Assemblies for 4--20 mA HART 4--20 mA HART for use without D4 option 4--20 mA HART for use with D4 option 4--20 mA HART NAMUR compliant for use with or without D4 option Assembly for 1--5 Vdc HART low power 02051-9001-0001 02051-9001-0002 02051-9001-0012 1--5 Vdc HART Protocol 02051-9001-1001 LCD display, HART Protocol Part number LCD display kit(1) 4--20 mA with aluminum housing 4--20 mA with stainless steel housing 1--5 Vdc with aluminum housing 1--5 Vdc with stainless steel housing LCD displays only(2) 03031-0193-0101 03031-0193-0111 03031-0193-0001 03031-0193-0011 For 4--20 mA output 03031-0193-0103 For 1--5 Vdc low power output 03031-0193-0003 LCD display hardware, both 4--20 mA and 1--5 Vdc low power Aluminum display cover assembly(3) Stainless steel display cover assembly(3) 03031-0193-0002 03031-0193-0012 O-ring package for electronics housing cover, pkg of 12 03031-0232-0001 Zero and span hardware adjustments (D4 option) Zero and span kit for 4--20 mA HART Protocol(4) Zero and span kit for aluminum housing 02051-9010-0001 Zero and span kit for stainless steel housing 02051-9010-0002 Zero and span kit for 4--20 mA HART NAMUR compliant (C4/CN) option(5) Zero and span kit for aluminum housing Zero and span Kit for stainless steel housing Zero and span kit for 1--5 Vdc HART low power(5) 02051-9010-1001 02051-9010-1002 Zero and span kit for aluminum housing Zero and span kit for stainless steel housing O-ring packages (package of 12) 02051-9010-1001 02051-9010-1002 Electronic housing, cover (standard and meter) 03031-0232-0001 Electronics housing, module 03031-0233-0001 Process flange, glass-filled PTFE 03031-0234-0001 Process flange, graphite-filled PTFE 03031-0234-0002 Flange adapter, glass-filled PTFE 03031-0242-0001 Flange adapter, graphite-filled PTFE 03031-0242-0002 1. Kit includes LCD display, captive mounting hardware, 10-pin interconnection header, cover assembly. 2. Displays include LCD display, captive mounting hardware, 10-pin interconnection header. No cover assembly. 3. Display cover assembly includes the cover and O-ring only. 4. Kit includes zero and span hardware adjustments and electronics board. 5. Kit includes zero and span hardware adjustments only. 145 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Flanges Part number Differential coplanar flange Nickel-plated carbon steel 316 stainless steel Cast C-276 Gage coplanar flange Nickel-plated carbon steel 316 stainless steel Cast C-276 Coplanar flange alignment screw (package of 12) 03031-0388-0025 03031-0388-0022 03031-0388-0023 03031-0388-1025 03031-0388-1022 03031-0388-1023 03031-0309-0001 Traditional flange 316 stainless steel Cast C-276 Level flange, vertical mount 2 in., Class 150, stainless steel 2 in., Class 300, stainless steel 3 in., Class 150, stainless steel 3 in., Class 300, stainless steel DIN, DN 50, PN 40 DIN, DN 80, PN 40 Flange adapter 03031-0320-0002 03031-0320-0003 03031-0393-0221 03031-0393-0222 03031-0393-0231 03031-0393-0232 03031-0393-1002 03031-0393-1012 Nickel-plated carbon steel 316 stainless steel Cast C-276 Drain/vent valve kits (each kit contains parts for one transmitter) 02024-0069-0005 02024-0069-0002 02024-0069-0003 Differential drain/vent kits 316 stainless steel stem and seat kit Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit 316 stainless steel ceramic ball drain/vent kit Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit Gage drain/vent kits 01151-0028-0022 01151-0028-0023 03031-0378-0022 01151-0028-0123 316 stainless steel stem and seat kit Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit 316 stainless steel ceramic ball drain/vent kit Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit 01151-0028-0012 01151-0028-0013 03031-0378-0012 01151-0028-0113 Specifications and Reference Data Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Mounting brackets Rosemount 2051C and 2051L coplanar flange bracket kit B4 bracket, stainless steel, 2-in. pipe mount, stainless steel bolts Rosemount 2051T bracket kit 03031-0189-0003 B4 bracket, stainless steel, 2-in. pipe mount, stainless steel bolts Rosemount 2051C Traditional Flange bracket kits 03031-0189-0004 B1 bracket, 2-in. pipe mount, carbon steel bolts B2 bracket, panel mount, carbon steel bolts B3 flat bracket for 2-in. pipe mount, carbon steel bolts B7 (B1 style bracket with stainless steel bolts) B8 (B2 style bracket with stainless steel bolts) B9 (B3 style bracket with stainless steel bolts) BA (stainless steel B1 bracket with stainless steel bolts) BC (stainless steel B3 bracket with stainless steel bolts) Bolt kits 03031-0313-0001 03031-0313-0002 03031-0313-0003 03031-0313-0007 03031-0313-0008 03031-0313-0009 03031-0313-0011 03031-0313-0013 Coplanar flange Flange bolt kit (44 mm [1.75-in.]) (set of 4) Carbon steel 316 stainless steel ASTM A 193, Grade B7M ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M Flange/adapter bolt kit (73 mm [2.88-in.]) (Set of 4) 03031-0312-0001 03031-0312-0002 03031-0312-0003 03031-0312-0005 Carbon steel 316 stainless steel ASTM A 193, Grade B7M ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M Manifold/flange kit [57 mm (2.25 in.)] (set of 4) 03031-0306-0001 03031-0306-0002 03031-0306-0003 03031-0306-0005 Carbon steel 316 stainless steel ASTM A 193, Grade B7M ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M 03031-0311-0001 03031-0311-0002 03031-0311-0003 03031-0311-0020 146 Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Traditional flange Differential flange and adapter bolt kit (44 mm [1.75-in.]) (Set of 8) Carbon steel 03031-0307-0001 316 stainless steel 03031-0307-0002 ASTM A 193, Grade B7M 03031-0307-0003 ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M 03031-0307-0005 Gage flange and adapter bolt Kit (set of 6) Carbon steel 316 stainless steel ASTM A 193, Grade B7M ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M Manifold/traditional flange bolts Carbon steel 316 stainless steel Level flange, vertical mount 03031-0307-1001 03031-0307-1002 03031-0307-1003 03031-0307-1005 Use bolts supplied with manifold Use bolts supplied with manifold Flange bolt kit (set of 4) Carbon steel 316 stainless steel Covers 03031-0395-0001 03031-0395-0002 Aluminum field terminal cover + O-ring Stainless steel field terminal cover + O-ring Aluminum HART electronics cover: cover + O-ring 316 stainless steel HART electronics cover: cover + O-ring Aluminum electronics/LCD display cover assembly: cover + O-ring Stainless steel electronics/LCD display cover assembly: cover + O-ring Miscellaneous 03031-0292-0001(1) 03031-0292-0002(1) 03031-0292-0001(1) 03031-0292-0002(1) 03031-0193-0002 03031-0193-0012 External ground screw assembly (option V5) 03031-0398-0001 1. Covers are blind, not for use with LCD display. Refer to LCD display section for LCD covers. 147 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Specifications and Reference Data July 2017 Specifications and Reference Data 148 Product Certifications July 2017 Appendix B Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Rev 1.5 European Directive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 149 Ordinary Location Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 149 North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 149 Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 150 International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 151 Brazil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 152 China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 153 Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 154 Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 154 Additional Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 155 Approval drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 156 B.1 European Directive Information A copy of the EU Declaration of Conformity can be found at the end of the Quick Start Guide. The most recent revision of the EU Declaration of Conformity can be found at Emerson.com/Rosemount. I5 USA Intrinsic Safety (IS) and Nonincendive (NI) Certificate: FM16US0231X Standards: FM Class 3600 - 2011, FM Class 3610 - 2010, FM Class 3611 - 2004, FM Class 3810 - 2005, ANSI/NEMA 250 2008 Markings: IS CL I, DIV 1, GP A, B, C, D; CL II, DIV 1, GP E, F, G; Class III; DIV 1 when connected per Rosemount drawing 02051-1009; Class I, Zone 0; AEx ia IIC T4; NI CL 1, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D; T4(--50 °C Ta +70 °C); Type 4X B.2 Ordinary Location Certification As standard, the transmitter has been examined and tested to determine that the design meets the basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by a nationally recognized test laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). B.3 North America Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. The Rosemount 2051 Transmitter housing contains aluminum and is considered a potential risk of ignition by impact or friction. Care must be taken into account during installation and use to prevent impact and friction. IE USA FISCO Certificate: 3033457 Standards: FM Class 3600 -- 2011, FM Class 3610 -- 2010, FM Class 3611 -- 2004, FM Class 3810 -- 2005 Markings: IS CL I, DIV 1, GP A, B, C, D when connected per Rosemount drawing 02051-1009 (--50 °C Ta +60 °C); Type 4X E5 USA Explosionproof (XP) and Dust-Ignitionproof (DIP) Certificate: FM16US0232 Standards: FM Class 3600 - 2011, FM Class 3615 - 2006, FM Class 3616 - 2011, FM Class 3810 - 2005, ANSI/NEMA 250 2008. ANSI/IEC 60529 2004 Markings: XP CL I, DIV 1, GP B, C, D; DIP CL II, DIV 1, GP E, F, G; CL III; T5(--50 °C Ta +85 °C); Factory Sealed; Type 4X 149 Special Condition for Safe Use (X): The Rosemount 2051 Transmitter housing contains aluminum and is considered a potential risk of ignition by impact or friction. Care must be taken into account during installation and use to prevent impact and friction. Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 E6 Canada Explosion-Proof, Dust Ignition Proof Certificate: 2041384 Standards: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-10, CSA Std C22.2 No. 25-1966, CSA Std C22.2 No. 30-M1986, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 94-M91, CSA Std C22.2 No.142-M1987, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.157-92, CSA Std C22.2 No. 213-M1987, CAN/CSA-E60079-0:07, CAN/CSA-E60079-1:07, CAN/CSA-E60079-11-02, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60529:05, ANSI/ISA-12.27.01--2003 Markings: Explosion-Proof for Class I, Divisions 1, Groups B, C, and D. Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II and Class III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G. Suitable for Class I, Division 2; Groups A, B, C, and D for indoor and outdoor hazardous locations. Class I Zone 1 Ex d IIC T5. Enclosure type 4X, factory sealed. Single Seal I6 Canada Intrinsic Safety Certificate: 2041384 Standards: CSA Std. C22.2 No. 142 - M1987, CSA Std.C22.2 No. 213 - M1987, CSA Std. C22.2 No.157 - 92, CSA Std. C22.2 No. 213 - M1987, ANSI/ISA 12.27.01 -- 2003, CAN/CSA-E60079-0:07, CAN/CSA-E60079-11:02 Markings: Intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A,B, C, and D when connected in accordance with Rosemount drawing 02051-1008. Ex ia IIC T3C. Single Seal. Enclosure Type 4X B.4 Europe E1 ATEX Flameproof Certificate: KEMA 08ATEX0090X Standards: EN 60079-0:2012 + A11:2013, EN 60079-1:2014, EN 60079-26:2015 Markings: II 1/2 G Ex db IIC Ga/Gb T6 (--60 °C Ta 70 °C); T4/T5 (--60 °C Ta 80 °C) Table B-1. Process Connection Temperature Temperature class Process temperature Ambient temperature Table B-1. Process Connection Temperature T6 --60 °C to +70 °C --60 °C to +70 °C T5 --60 °C to +80 °C --60 °C to +80 °C T4 --60 °C to +120 °C --60 °C to +80 °C Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): 1. Appropriate cable, glands and plugs need to be suitable for a temperature of 5 °C greater than maximum specified temperature for location where installed. 2. Non- standard paint options may cause risk from electrostatic discharge. Avoid installations that could cause electrostatic build-up on painted surfaces, and only clean the painted surfaces with a damp cloth. If paint is ordered through a special option code, contact the manufacturer for more information. 3. The device contains a thin wall diaphragm less than 1 mm thickness that forms a boundary between zone 0 (process connection) and zone 1 (all other parts of the equipment). The model code and datasheet are to be consulted for details of the diaphragm material. Installation, maintenance and use shall take into account the environmental conditions to which the diaphragm shall be subjected. The manufacturer's instructions for installation and maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure safety during its expected lifetime. 4. Flameproof joints are not intended for repair. I1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0129X Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-11:2012 Markings: Ex II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C Ta +70 °C) Table B-2. Input Parameters Parameter HART Fieldbus/PROFIBUS Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li 30 V 200 mA 1.0 W 0.012 F 0 mH 30 V 300 mA 1.3 W 0 F 0 mH Product Certifications 150 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation. 2. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in Zone 0. IA ATEX FISCO Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0129X Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-11:2012 Markings: Ex II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C Ta +60 °C) Table B-3. Input Parameters Parameter FISCO Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li 17.5 V 380 mA 5.32 W 0 F 0 mH Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): 1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation. 2. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in Zone 0. N1 ATEX Type n Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0130X Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-15:2010 Markings: Ex II 3G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc (--40 °C Ta +70 °C) Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V electrical strength test as defined in clause 6.5.1 of by EN 60079-15:2010. This must be taken into account during installation. ND ATEX Dust Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0182X Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-31:2009 Markings: Da II 1 D (--20 Ex °C taTIaIIC+T8955°°CC)T500 105 °C Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation. B.5 International E7 IECEx Flameproof Certificate: IECExKEM08.0024X Standards: IEC 60079-0:2011, IEC 60079-1:2014-06, IEC 60079-26:2014-10 Markings: Ex db IIC T6...T4 Ga/Gb T6(--60 °C Ta +70 °C), T4/T5(--60 °C Ta +80 °C) Table B-4. Process Connection Temperature Temperature class Process temperature Ambient temperature T6 --60 °C to +70 °C --60 °C to +70 °C T5 --60 °C to +80 °C --60 °C to +80 °C T4 --60 °C to +120 °C --60 °C to +80 °C Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): 1. The device contains a thin wall diaphragm less than 1 mm thickness that forms a boundary between zone 0 (process connection) and zone 1 (all other parts of the equipment). The model code and datasheet are to be consulted for details of the diaphragm material. Installation, maintenance and use shall take into account the environmental conditions to which the diaphragm shall be subjected. The manufacturer's instructions for installation and maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure safety during its expected lifetime. 2. Appropriate cable, glands and plugs need to be suitable for a temperature of 5 °C greater than maximum specified temperature for location where installed. 3. Flameproof joints are not intended for repair. 4. Non-standard paint options may cause risk from electrostatic discharge. Avoid installations that could cause electrostatic build-up on painted surfaces, and only clean the painted surfaces with a damp cloth. If paint is ordered through a special option code, contact the manufacturer for more information. 151 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 I7 IECEx Intrinsic Safety Certificate: IECExBAS08.0045X Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-11:2011 Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C Ta +70 °C) Table B-5. Input Parameters Parameter HART Fieldbus/PROFIBUS Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li 30 V 200 mA 1.0 W 0.012 F 0 mH 30 V 300 mA 1.3 W 0 F 0 mH Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation. 2. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in Zone 0. IG IECEx FISCO Certificate: IECExBAS08.0045X Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-11:2011 Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C Ta +60 °C) Table B-6. Input Parameters Parameter FISCO Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li 17.5 V 380 mA 5.32 W 0 nF 0 H Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation. 2. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in Zone 0. N7 IECEx Type n Certificate: IECExBAS08.0046X Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-15:2010 Markings: Ex nA IIC T4 Gc (--40 °C Ta +70 °C) Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. If fitted with a 90 V transient suppressor, the equipment is not capable of withstanding the 500 V electrical strength test as defined in clause 6.5.1 of IEC60079-15:2010. This must be taken into account during installation. B.6 Brazil E2 INMETRO Flameproof Certificate: UL-BR 14.0375X Standards: ABNT NBR IEC60079-0:2008 + Errata 1:2011, ABNT NBR IEC 60079-1:2009 + Errata 1:2011,ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008 + Errata 1:2009 Markings: Ex d IIC T6/T5 Gb IP66, T6(--50 °C Ta +65 °C), T5(--50 °C Ta +80 °C) Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. The device contains a thin wall diaphragm. Installation, maintenance and use shall take into account the environmental conditions to which the diaphragm will be subjected. The manufacturer's instructions for installation and maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure safety during its expected lifetime. 2. The Ex d blanking elements, cable glands, and wiring shall be suitable for a temperature of 90 °C. 3. In case of repair, contact the manufacturer for information on the dimensions of the flameproof joints. I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety Certificate: UL-BR 14.0759X Standards: ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008 + Errata 1:2011; ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C Ta +70 °C) Table B-7. Input Parameters Parameter HART Fieldbus/PROFIBUS Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li 30 V 200 mA 1 W 0.012 F 0 mH 30 V 300 mA 1.3 W 0 nF 0 H Product Certifications 152 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): 1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V insulation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation. 2. The enclosure may be made of aluminium alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in atmospheres that require ELP Ga. IB INMETRO FISCO Certificate: UL-BR 14.0759X Standards: ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008 + Errata 1:2011; ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C Ta +60 °C) Table B-8. Input Parameters Parameter FISCO Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li 17.5 V 380 mA 5.32 W 0 nF 0 H Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V insulation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation. 2. The enclosure may be made of aluminium alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in atmospheres that require ELP Ga. B.7 China E3 China Flameproof Certificate: GYJ13.1386X; GYJ5.1366X [Flowmeters] Standards: GB3836.1-2010, GB3836.2-2010, GB3836.20-2010-2010 Markings: Pressure Transmitter: Ex d IIC Gb, T6(--50 °C Ta +65 °C), T5(--50 °C Ta +80 °C) Flowmeter: Ex d IIC Ga/Gb, T6(--50 °C Ta +65 °C), T5(--50 °C Ta +80 °C) Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): 1. Symbol "X" is used to denote specific conditions of use: The Ex d blanking elements, cable glands, and wiring shall be suitable for a temperature of 90 °C. This device contains a thin wall diaphragm. Installation, maintenance and use shall take into account the environment conditions to which the diaphragm will be subjected. 2. The relation between T code and ambient temperature range is: Ta --50 °C Ta +80 °C --50 °C Ta +65 °C Temperature class T5 T6 3. The earth connection facility in the enclosure should be connected reliably. 4. During installation, use and maintenance of the product, observe the warning "Don't open the cover when the circuit is alive." 5. During installation, there should be no mixture harmful to flameproof housing. 6. Cable entry and conduit, certified by NEPSI with type of protection Ex d IIC and appropriate thread form, should be applied when installed in a hazardous location. Blanking elements should be used on the redundant cable entries. 7. End users are not permitted to change any internal components, but to settle the problem in conjunction with the manufacturer to avoid damage to the product. 8. Maintenance should be done in a non-hazardous location. 9. During installation, use and maintenance of this product, observe the following standards: GB3836.13-2013, GB3836.15-2000, GB3836.16-2006, GB50257-2014. I3 China Intrinsic Safety Certificate: GYJ12.1295X; GYJ15.1365X [Flowmeters] Standards: GB3836.1-2010, GB3836.4-2010, GB3836.20-2010 Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C Ta +70 °C) 153 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): 1. Symbol "X" is used to denote specific conditions of use: a. If the apparatus is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is not capable of withstanding the 500 V insulation test for 1 minute. This must be taken into account when installing the apparatus. b. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however, care should be taken to protect it from impact or abrasion if located in Zone 0. 2. The relation between T code and ambient temperature range is: Model T code Temperature range HART, Fieldbus, PROFIBUS, and Low Power T4 --60 °C Ta +70 °C 3. Intrinsically safe parameters: Parameter HART Fieldbus/ PROFIBUS Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li 30 V 200 mA 1 W 0.012 F 0 mH 30 V 300 mA 1.3 W 0 F 0 mH FISCO 17.5 V 380 mA 5.32 W 0 nF 0 F Note FISCO parameters comply with the requirements for FISCO field devices in GB3836.19-2010. [For Flowmeters] When Rosemount 644 Temperature Transmitter is used, the transmitter should be used with Ex-certified associated apparatus to establish explosion protection system that can be used in explosive gas atmospheres. Wiring and terminals should comply with the instruction manual of both Rosemount 644 and associated apparatus. The cables between Rosemount 644 and associated apparatus should be shielded cables (the cables must have insulated shield). The shielded cable has to be grounded reliably in a non-hazardous area. 4. The product should be used with Ex-certified associated apparatus to establish explosion protection system that can be used in explosive gas atmospheres. Wiring and terminals should comply with the instruction manual of the product and associated apparatus. 5. The cables between this product and associated apparatus should be shielded cables (the cables must have insulated shield). The shielded cable has to be grounded reliably in a non-hazardous area. 6. End users are not permitted to change any internal components, and needs to settle the problem in conjunction with the manufacturer to avoid damage to the product. 7. During installation, use and maintenance of this product, observe the following standards: GB3836.13-2013, GB3836.15-2000, GB3836.16-2006, GB3836.18-2010, GB50257-2014. B.8 Japan E4 Japan Flameproof Certificate: TC20598, TC20599, TC20602, TC20603 [HART]; TC20600, TC20601, TC20604, TC20605 [Fieldbus] Markings: Ex d IIC T5 B.9 Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) EM EAC Flameproof Certificate: RU C-US.GB05.B.01199 Markings: Ga/Gb Ex d IIC T5/T6 X, T5(--50 °C Ta +80 °C), T6(--50 °C Ta +65 °C) Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. See certificate for special conditions. IM EAC Intrinsically Safe Certificate: RU C-US.GB05.B.01199 Markings: 0Ex ia IIC T4 Ga X (--60 °C Ta +70 °C) Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. See certificate for special conditions. B.9.1 Combinations K1 Combination of E1, I1, N1, and ND K2 Combination of E2 and I2 K5 Combination of E5 and I5 K6 Combination of E6 and I6 Product Certifications 154 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA K7 Combination of E7, I7, N7 and IECEx Dust IECEx Type n Certificate: IECExBAS08.0058X Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-15:2010 Markings: Ex nA IIIC T95 °C T500 105 °C Da (--20 °C Ta +85 °C) Special Condition for Safe Use (X): 1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding a 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation. KA Combination of E1, I1, and K6 KB Combination of K5 and K6 KC Combination of E1, I1, and K5 KD Combination of K1, K5, and K6 KM Combination of EM and IM SDN Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval Certificate: TAA00004F Intended Use: DNV GL Rules for Classification Ships and offshore units Application: Locations classes Type Temperature Humidity Vibration EMC Enclosure 2051 D B A B D SLL Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval Certificate: 11/60002 Application: Environmental categories ENV1, ENV2, ENV3, and ENV5 B.10 Additional Certifications SBS American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval Certificate: 09-HS446883B-3-PDA Intended Use: Marine and Offshore Applications Measurement of either Gauge or Absolute Pressure for Liquid, Gas, and Vapor ABS Rules: 2013 Steel Vessels Rules 1-1-4/7.7, 1-1-Appendix 3, 4-8-3/1.7, 4-8-3/13.1 SBV Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval Certificate: 23157/B0 BV BV Rules: Bureau Veritas Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships Application: Class notations: AUT-UMS, AUT-CCS, AUT-PORT and AUT-IMS; Pressure transmitter type 2051 cannot be installed on diesel engines 155 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA B.11 Approval drawings Figure B-1. Factory mutual 02051-1009 Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 156 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 157 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 158 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 159 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 160 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 161 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 162 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 163 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 164 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 165 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 166 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 167 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 168 Product Certifications July 2017 Figure B-2. Canadian standards association (CSA) 02051-1008 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 169 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 170 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 171 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 172 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 173 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 174 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 175 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary Product Certifications 176 Product Certifications July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Electronic Master PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED Rosemount Proprietary 177 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Product Certifications July 2017 Product Certifications 178 Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Appendix C Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys Field Communicator menu trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179 Field Communicator Fast Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 184 C.1 Field Communicator menu trees Figure C-1. RosemountTM 2051 Field Communicator Menu Tree: Overview Active Alerts 1 Refresh Alerts 2 Active Alert 1 3 Active Alert 2 4 Etc Home 1 Overview 2 Configure 3 Service Tools Comm Status: Polled Communication Change Overview 1 Device Status 2 Comm Status 3 PV 4 Analog Output 5 Upper Range Value 6 Lower Range Value 7 Device Information Device Information 1 Identification 2 Revision Numbers 3 Sensor Module Info 4 Flange Info 5 Remote Seal Info 6 Alarm Levels 7 Security Identification 1 Tag 2 Long Tag 3 Model 4 Serial Number 5 Date 6 Description 7 Message 8 Model Numbers 9 Manufacturer Revision Numbers 1 Universal Revision 2 Field Device 3 Software 4 Hardware 5 Device Driver Revision 1 Model Number 1 2 Model Number 2 3 Model Number 3 Sensor Module Info 1 Serial Number 2 Measurement Type 3 Configuration 4 Sensor Range 5 PV Upper Limit 6 PV Lower Limit 7 Isolator material 8 Fill Fluid Flange Info 1 Process Connection 2 Process Connection Material 3 O-ring Material 4 Drain/Vent Material Remote Seal Info 1 Num of Remote Seals 2 Seal Type 3 Fill Fluid 4 Diaphragm Material Alarm Levels 1 Alarm Direction 2 High Alarm 3 High Saturation 4 Low Saturation 5 Low Alarm Security 1 Security Switch Status 2 External Buttons 3 Configuration Buttons 4 HART Lock 5 LOI Password Protection HART Lock Device Lock LOI Password Protection Password Protection Selections with black circle are only available in HART® Revision 7 mode. Selection will not appear in HART Revision 5 DD. 179 Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys July 2017 Figure C-2. Rosemount 2051 Field Communicator menu tree: Configure - Guided Setup Device Tagging 1 Tag 2 Long Tag 3 Description 4 Message 5 Date Guided Setup 1 Basic Setup 2 Zero Trim 3 Configure Display 4 Scaled Variable 5 Configure Burst Mode Basic Setup 1 Device Tagging 2 Units of Measure/Damping 3 Variable Mapping 4 Analog Output 5 Alarm/Saturation Values Configure Display 1 Pressure 2 Scaled Variable 3 Sensor Temperature 4 Percent of Range 5 Analog Output 6 Review Parameters at Start-up Units of Measure/Damping Units of Measure 1 Units of Measure 1 Pressure 2 Damping 2 Sensor Temp Units Variable Mapping 1 Primary Variable 2 Second Variable 3 Third Variable 4 Fourth Variable Analog Output 1 Primary Variable 2 Upper Range Value 3 Lower Range Value Alarm/Saturation Values 1 Alarm Direction 2 High Alarm 3 High Saturation 4 Low Saturation 5 Low Alarm 6 Config Alarm/Sat Values Home 1 Overview 2 Configure 3 Service Tools Configure 1 Guided Setup 2 Manual Setup 3 Alert Setup Scaled Variable 1 SV Data Points 2 SV Units 3 SV Transfer Function 4 SV Linear Offset 5 SV Cutoff mode 6 SV Low Cutoff 7 Scaled Variable Configure Burst Mode 1 Burst Message 1 2 Message 1 Content 3 Message 1 Variables Message 1 Variables 1 First and Trigger Variable 2 Second Variable 3 Third Variable 4 Fourth Variable Selections with black circle are only available in HART Revision 7 mode. Selection will not appear in HART Revision 5 DD. Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys 180 Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure C-3. Rosemount 2051 Field Communicator menu tree: Configure - Manual Setup Home 1 Overview 2 Configure 3 Service Tools Configure 1 Guided Setup 2 Manual Setup 3 Alert Setup Manual Setup 1 Process Variables 2 Analog Output 3 Scaled Variable 4 Display 5 HART 6 Security 7 Device Information Pressure Setup 1 Pressure 2 Upper Range Value 3 Lower Range Value 4 Pressure Units 5 Damping 6 AO Transfer Function Set Range Points 1 Primary Variable 2 Upper Range Value 3 Lower Range Value Process Variables 1 Pressure Setup 2 Sensor Temperature Setup Sensor Temperature Setup 1 Sensor Temperature 2 Sensor Temp Units Analog Output 1 Set Range Points 2 Range by Applying Pressure 3 Sensor Limits 4 Readings 5 Alarm/Saturation Levels Scaled Variable 1 SV Data Points 2 SV Units 3 SV Transfer Function 4 SV Linear Offset 5 SV Cutoff mode 6 SV Low Cutoff 7 Scaled Variable Display 1 Pressure 2 Scaled Variable 3 Sensor Temperature 4 Percent of Range 5 Analog Output 6 Review Parameters at Start-up Variable Mapping 1 Primary Variable 2 Second Variable 3 Third Variable 4 Fourth Variable Communication Settings 1 Polling Address 2 Change Polling Address 3 Universal Revision 4 Change HART Revision Burst Mode Configuration 1 Burst Message 1 2 Message 1 Content 3 Message 1 Variable 4 Configure Additional Messages Sensor Limits 1 PV Upper Limit 2 PV Lower Limit 3 PV Minimum Span Readings 1 Analog Output 2 Percent of Range Alarm/Saturation Levels 1 Alarm Direction 2 High Alarm 3 High Saturation 4 Low Saturation 5 Low Alarm 6 Config Alarm/Set Levels Message 1 Variable 1 First and Trigger Variable 2 Second Variable 3 Third Variable 4 Fourth Variable HART 1 Variable Mapping 2 Communication Settings 3 Burst Mode Configuration Security 1 Security Switch Status 2 External Buttons 3 Configuration Buttons 4 HART Lock 5 LOI Password Protection HART Lock 1 Lock Status 2 Lock/Unlock LOI Password 1 Password Protection 2 Configure Password Device Information 1 Indentification 2 Revision Numbers 3 Sensor Module Info 4 Flange Info 5 Remote Seal Info Identification 1 Tag 2 Long Tag 3 Model 44 Serial Number 55 Date 6 Description 77 Message 88 Model Numbers 99 Manufacturer Revision Numbers 1 Universal Revision 2 Device Revision 3 Software Revision 4 Hardware Revision 5 Device Driver Revision Model Numbers 1 Model Number 1 2 Model Number 2 3 Model Number 3 Sensor Module Info 1 Configuration 2 Measurement Type 3 Sensor Range 4 Upper Limit 5 Lower Limit 6 Isolator Material 7 Fill Fluid Flange Info 1 Process Connection 2 Process Connection Material 3 O-ring Material 4 Drain/Vent Material Remote Seal Info 1 Num of Remote Seals 2 Seal Type 3 Fill Fluid 4 Diaphragm Material Selections with black circle are only available in HART Revision 7 mode. Selection will not appear in HART Revision 5 DD. 181 Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys July 2017 Figure C-4. Rosemount 2051 Field Communicator menu tree: Configure - Alert Setup Home 1 Overview 2 Configure 3 Service Tools Configure 1 Guided Setup 2 Manual Setup 3 Alert Setup Alert Setup 11 APlraersmsu/SraetAurlearttion Levels 2 Temperature Alert 3 Alarm/Saturation Levels Pressure Alert 1 Configure Alert 2 Alert Mode 3 High Alert Value 4 Low Alert Value 5 Trend Temperature Alert 1 Configure Alert 2 Alert Mode 3 High Alert Value 4 Low Alert Value 5 Trend Alarm/Saturation Levels 1 Alarm Direction 2 High Alarm 3 High Saturation 4 Low Saturation 5 Low Alarm 6 Config Alarm/Sat Levels Selections with black circle are only available in HART Revision 7 mode. Selection will not appear in HART Revision 5 DD. Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys 182 Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure C-5. Rosemount 2051 Field Communicator menu tree - Service Tools Home 1 Overview 2 Configure 3 Service Tools Service Tools 1 Active Alerts 2 Variables 3 Trends 4 Maintenance 5 Simulate Active Alerts 1 Refresh Alerts 2 Active Alert 1 3 Active Alert 2 4 Etc. Variables 1 Variable Summary 2 Pressure 3 Scaled Variable 4 Analog Output 5 Percent of Range 6 Sensor Temperature Trends 1 Pressure 2 Scaled Variable 3 Sensor Temperature Pressure 1 Pressure 2 Status Scaled Variable 1 Scaled Variable 2 Status Analog Output Analog Output Percent of Range Percent of Range Sensor Temperature 1 Sensor Temperature 2 Status Pressure Calibration 1 Upper Sensor Trim 2 Lower Sensor Trim 3 Zero Trim 4 Damping 5 AO Transfer Function 6 Last Calibration Points 7 Sensor Limits Maintenance 1 Pressure Calibration 2 Analog Calibration 3 Restore Factory Calibration 4 Security 5 Locate Device 6 Device Reset Simulate 1 Loop Test 2 Pressure 3 Scaled Variable 4 Sensor Temperature Security 1 Security Switch Status 2 External Buttons 3 Configuration Buttons 4 HART Lock 5 LOI Password Protection AO Transfer Function 1 Upper Calibration Points 2 Lower Calibration Points Sensor Limits 1 PV Upper Limit 2 PV Lower Limit 3 PV Minimum Span HART Lock 1 Device Lock 2 Lock/Unlock LOI Password Protection 1 Password Protection 2 Configure Password Selections with black circle are only available in HART Revision 7 mode. Selection will not appear in HART Revision 5 DD. 183 Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys July 2017 C.2 Field Communicator Fast Keys A () indicates the basic configuration parameters. At minimum these parameters should be verified as a part of configuration and startup. A (7) indicates availability only in HART revision 7 mode. Table C-1. Device Revision 9 and 10 (HART7), DD Revision 1 Fast Key Sequence Function Alarm and Saturation Levels Damping Primary Variable Range Values Tag Transfer Function Pressure Units Date Descriptor Digital to Analog Trim (4--20 mA / 1--5 V output) Digital Zero Trim Display Configuration LOI Password Protection Loop Test Lower Sensor Trim Message Pressure Trend Rerange with Keypad Scaled D/A Trim (4--20 mA / 1--5 V) output) Scaled Variable Sensor Temperature Trend Switch HART Revision Upper Sensor Trim 7 Long Tag 7 Locate Device 7 Simulate Digital Signal Fast Key sequence HART 7 HART 5 2, 2, 2, 5 2, 2, 1, 1, 5 2, 2, 5, 1, 1 2, 2, 2, 1 2, 2, 7, 1, 1 2, 2, 1, 1, 6 2, 2, 1, 1, 4 2, 2, 7, 1, 5 2, 2, 7, 1, 6 3, 4, 2, 1 3, 4, 1, 3 2, 2, 4 2, 2, 6, 5 3, 5, 1 3, 4, 1, 2 2, 2, 7, 1, 7 3, 3, 1 2, 2, 2, 1 3, 4, 2, 2 2, 2, 3 3, 3, 3 2, 2, 5, 2, 4 3, 4, 1, 1 2, 2, 7, 1, 2 3, 4, 5 3, 5 2, 2, 2, 5 2, 2, 1, 1, 5 2, 2, 5, 1, 1 2, 2, 2, 1 2, 2, 7, 1, 1 2, 2, 1, 1, 6 2, 2, 1, 1, 4 2, 2, 7, 1, 4 2, 2, 7, 1, 5 3, 4, 2, 1 3, 4, 1, 3 2, 2, 4 2, 2, 6, 4 3, 5, 1 3, 4, 1, 2 2, 2, 7, 1, 6 3, 3, 1 2, 2, 2, 1 3, 4, 2, 2 2, 2, 3 3, 3, 3 2, 2, 5, 2, 3 3, 4, 1, 1 Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys 184 Local Operator Interface July 2017 Appendix D Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Local Operator Interface LOI Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 185 LOI Menu Tree - Extended Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 186 Number entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 187 Text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 188 D.1 LOI Menu Tree LOI MENU VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU Local Operator Interface UNITS PRESSURE UNITS TEMP UNITS BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU RERANGE ENTER VALUES APPLY VALUES BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU LOOP TEST SET 4MA SET 20MA SET CUSTOM END LOOP TEST BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU DISPLAY PRESS (on/off) SCALED (on/off) TEMP (on/off) RANGE % (on/off) STARTUP (on/off) BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU VIEW CONFIG TAG PV PRESS UNITS TEMP UNITS URV LRV TRANSFER FUNCTION DAMPING HIALARM LOALARM HISAT LOSAT ALARM SECURITY BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU ENTER VALUES LRV URV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU APPLY VALUES LRV URV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU 185 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Local Operator Interface July 2017 D.2 LOI Menu Tree - Extended Menu CALIBRAT ZERO TRIM LOWER TRIM UPPER TRIM ANALOG TRIM FACTORY RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU FACTORY RECALL SENSOR RECALL ANALOG RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU TRANSFER FUNCT LINEAR TRANSFER FUNCTION SQR ROOT TRANSFER FUNCTION BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU SCALED VARIAB VIEW SCALED CONFIG SCALED BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU ASSIGN PV PRESSURE SET PV SCALED SET PV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU ALARM SAT VALUES ROSEMOUNT VALUES NAMUR VALUES OTHER VALUES BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU PASSWORD ENABLE PASSWORD CHANGE PASSWORD BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU OTHER VALUES HIGH ALARM LOW ALARM HIGH SATURATION LOW SATURATION BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU SIMULATE SIMULATE PRESS SIMULATE TEMP SIMULATE SCALED END SIMUL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU HART REV HART7 REV HART5 REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU 186 Local Operator Interface Local Operator Interface July 2017 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA D.3 Number entry Floating-point numbers can be entered with the LOI. All eight number locations on the top line can be used for number entry. Refer to Table 2-2 on page 11 for LOI button operation. Below is a floating-point number entry example for changing a value of "-0000022" to "000011.2" Step Instruction Current position (indicated by underline) When the number entry begins, the left most position is the selected 1 position. In this example, the negative symbol, "-", will be flashing on the screen. 2 Press the scroll button until the "0" is blinking on the screen in the selected position. 3 Press the enter button to select the "0" as an entry. The second digit from the left will be blinking. 4 Press the enter button to select "0" for second digit. The third digit from the left will be blinking. 5 Press the enter button to select "0" for the third digit. The fourth digit from the left will now be blinking. 6 Press the enter button to select "0" for the fourth digit. The fifth digit from the left will now be blinking. 7 Press scroll to navigate through the numbers until the "1" is on the screen. 8 Press the enter button to select the "1" for the fifth digit. The sixth digit from the left will now be blinking. 9 Press scroll to navigate through the numbers until the "1", is on the screen. 10 Press the enter button to select the "1" for the sixth digit. The seventh digit from the left will now be blinking. 11 Press scroll to navigate through the numbers until the decimal, ".", is on the screen. Press the enter button to select the decimal, ".", for the seventh digit. 12 After pressing enter, all digits to the right of the decimal will now be zero. The eighth digit from the left will now be blinking. 13 Press the scroll button to navigate through the numbers until the "2", is on the screen. 14 Press the enter button to select the "2" for the eighth digit. The number entry will be complete and a "SAVE" screen will be shown. -0000022 00000022 00000022 00000022 00000022 00000022 00001022 00001022 00001122 00001122 000011.2 000011.0 000011.2 000011.2 Usage notes: It is possible to move backwards in the number by scrolling to the left arrow symbol and pressing enter. The negative symbol is only allowed in the left most position. Numbers can be entered in scientific notation by placing an "E" in the 7th position. Local Operator Interface 187 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Local Operator Interface July 2017 D.4 Text entry 1. Text can be entered with the LOI. Depending on the edited item, up to eight locations on the top line can be used for text entry. Text entry follows the same rules as the number entry rules in "LOI Menu Tree" on page 185, except the following characters are available in all locations: A--Z, 0--9, --, /, space. Usage note: If the current text contains a character the LOI cannot display, it will be shown as an asterisk "*". 188 Local Operator Interface Global Headquarters Emerson Automation Solutions 6021 Innovation Blvd. Shakopee, MN 55379, USA +1 800 999 9307 or +1 952 906 8888 +1 952 949 7001 RFQ.RMD-RCC@Emerson.com North America Regional Office Emerson Automation Solutions 8200 Market Blvd. Chanhassen, MN 55317, USA +1 800 999 9307 or +1 952 906 8888 +1 952 949 7001 RMT-NA.RCCRFQ@Emerson.com Latin America Regional Office Emerson Automation Solutions 1300 Concord Terrace, Suite 400 Sunrise, FL 33323, USA +1 954 846 5030 +1 954 846 5121 RFQ.RMD-RCC@Emerson.com Europe Regional Office Emerson Automation Solutions Europe GmbH Neuhofstrasse 19a P.O. Box 1046 CH 6340 Baar Switzerland +41 (0) 41 768 6111 +41 (0) 41 768 6300 RFQ.RMD-RCC@Emerson.com Asia Pacific Regional Office Emerson Automation Solutions Asia Pacific Pte Ltd 1 Pandan Crescent Singapore 128461 +65 6777 8211 +65 6777 0947 Enquiries@AP.Emerson.com Middle East and Africa Regional Office Emerson Automation Solutions Emerson FZE P.O. Box 17033 Jebel Ali Free Zone - South 2 Dubai, United Arab Emirates +971 4 8118100 +971 4 8865465 RFQ.RMTMEA@Emerson.com Reference Manual 00809-0100-4107, Rev CA July 2017 Linkedin.com/company/Emerson-Automation-Solutions Twitter.com/Rosemount_News Facebook.com/Rosemount Youtube.com/user/RosemountMeasurement Google.com/+RosemountMeasurement Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found on the Terms and Conditions of Sale page. The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. AMS, Annubar, Instrument Toolkit, Hot Backup, Rosemount, and Rosemount logotype are trademarks of Emerson. HART and WirelessHART is a registered trademark of FieldComm Group. DTM is a trademark of the FDT Group. NEMA is a registered trademark and service mark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Neobee is a registered trademark of Stepan Specialty Products, LLC. SYLTHERM is a trademark of Dow Corning Corporation. Fluorinert is a trademark of 3M. FOUNDATION Fieldbus is a trademark of the FieldComm Group. eurofast and minifast are registered trademarks of TURCK. PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of PROFINET International (PI). All other marks are the property of their respective owners. © 2017 Emerson. All rights reserved.Acrobat Distiller 11.0 (Windows)